JP7401108B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a starting condition.

Some of these gaming machines control the game to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the end of a special game (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2018-057968A

However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the game is not very interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention is capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the winning of the game medium in the opening/closable starting area provided in the gaming area. a determining means, a variable display executing means for executing a variable display of symbols based on the result of the determination, a special game executing means capable of executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result, and a special game executing means capable of executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result. A game state control means capable of controlling a predetermined game state that is not being executed and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state, and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance of the game, wherein the specific game state is , a first specific game state that is controlled via the special game, a second specific game state that is controlled without going through the special game, and a third specific game state that is controlled without going through the special game. a gaming state, and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the first specific gaming state over a first period from the end of the special game, and the fluctuating display is different from the first specific losing result. If the second specific losing result is different, it is possible to control the second specific gaming state over a second period different from the first period, and the variable display is the first specific losing result. In this case, it is possible to control to the third specific gaming state over a predetermined period, and in the third specific gaming state, the game ball is in the starting area more than in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. It is a gaming state in which it is difficult to win a prize, and the performance control means is capable of executing a firing suggestion notification suggesting firing of gaming media to a specific area of the gaming area in the specific gaming state, It is characterized in that the firing suggestion notification is not executed when the starting area in the third specific gaming state is in a closed state .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing initial setting processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving and 2nd special time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for 1st special time saving. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a diagram showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a big winning a prize opening control data determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing small winning game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game. It is a figure which shows the general map general electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the various determination tables used in general electric power supply control processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after a setting change. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in the main control board of a 1st modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a timing chart when a normal time saving gaming state occurs. It is a timing chart when the normal time saving game state ends. It is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the first special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the production control section. It is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes. It is a diagram showing an effect mode that is set when transitioning from a time-saving gaming state to a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing of a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a flowchart showing a winning light emission effect determination process of the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of a prize winning. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-read continuous performance determination process of a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern judgment table. It is a flowchart showing special time-saving type performance processing of the performance control section. It is a diagram showing an execution period of a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the first special time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a look-ahead performance is executed during a normal gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a pre-reading performance ends midway during a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a variable performance is performed after transitioning to rush battle mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a jackpot is achieved in the variable performance in the final round of the rush battle mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the normal time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode was set ends. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the normal time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode was set ends. It is a diagram showing an example of performance in the case of a small hit with the remaining second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a small winning game is executed in super wild dance mode. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small winning game in the wild dance mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a special time-saving type performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when it becomes a customer waiting state when it moves to the 1st special time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transition to the first special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a countdown mode is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect when a countdown mode is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transition to the first special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the 1st special time-saving game state in which the infinite mode was set ends. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the case where a power failure recovery is performed during the normal game state after the end of the 1st special time-saving game state. It is a figure showing an example of a game state setting table in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing of the main control board in the second embodiment. It is a figure showing the game flow in a modification concerning a time-saving game state.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which game balls (game media) flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a dispensing device 95 (to be described later) dispensing an audio signal based on the establishment of dispensing conditions. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls; A firing operation device 13 that can be operated to fire a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations at the top of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, audio) effects. It looks like this. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality occurs in which the game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIG. 1 or 2 ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a production button 17 that can be set in a normal state and a normal state. an effect button drive device 17b, which includes a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 to a protruding state located above the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 to a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner; Further, a performance button light emitting LED 17c is provided for changing the performance button 17 between an off state and a lighted state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided to enable a player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game balls are rented by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full. During this period, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 5), and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 (see FIG. 5) for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, and a game board mounting frame 3 and A locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 5) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the firing member, and a firing member that slopes upward from the firing member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper are provided for stopping the game ball at a shooting position that is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 5) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a where a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a shooting ball guide path 38 is formed that guides the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 called a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and this decorative frame 40 allows the game area 5a to fire with a first firing force. The game area is divided into a left side gaming area where the game ball fired flows down, and a right side gaming area where the game ball fired with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down, and the left side gaming area and the right side gaming area. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to warp the game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are three general prize winning holes 43 spaced apart from each other, in which game balls can always be entered. One general winning hole 43 is provided in which a ball can always be won. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (the granting conditions are met), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are The balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded with prize value).

Below the stage part 42, there is a first starting hole 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which a game ball can always win (entering). When a game ball played (ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are delivered to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). The ball is then paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (awarded with prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a starting port lamp 75 that emits light in a predetermined manner when a lamp light emitting effect to be described later is performed is provided, and a lens member 75a is provided so as to cover the front of the starting port lamp 75. (object) is provided.

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, there is a mark indicating whether or not it is impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the hit determination described later). A variable starting section 46 is provided which can convert from a difficult closed state to an open state where it is possible or easy to win a game ball.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and also includes a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that is movable in the front-back direction, and a second A second starting port 47 (starting winning area with a second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting port opening/closing member 48, and a second starting port that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47. By moving the starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second starting port opening/closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second starting port 47 is changed to the closed state, and the second starting port is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 into an open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning-permitting position).

Then, a game ball enters the second starting port 47 which is in the open state during the auxiliary game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is met). ), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

The right side game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40 has an upstream flow path 91a into which all the game balls fired toward the right side game area flow, and almost all of the game balls that flowed out from the upstream flow path 91a. A left side flow path 91c into which game balls that bounced to the left without flowing into the center flow path 91b flow into the center flow path 91b, and a right side flow path into which game balls that bounced to the right without flowing into the center flow path 91b flow into. 91d of channels, a first downstream channel 91e into which almost all of the game balls flowing out from the center channel 91b and the game balls flowing out from the right channel 91d flow; A second downstream channel 91f is provided into which the game balls that have bounced and the game balls that have flowed out from the left channel 91c flow into the second downstream channel 91f.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, there is provided a regular game ball gate 44 (general game starting area) through which game balls can pass at all times, and game balls that have passed through the regular game gate 44 are detected by a gate detection switch 44a. If so, the prize ball is not awarded, but the right to make an auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a winning game is granted (general figure determination information to be described later is stored).

In the middle of the central channel 91b, there is a channel that changes from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination) to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize or to be opened easily. A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for game balls by having an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). a first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a first grand prize opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first great winning opening opening/closing member 51; By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a that detects the game ball that has won (entered the ball) into the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position). For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the open state by converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning permissible position). A first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

Then, when the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during a small winning game to be described later, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 A game ball that was flowing down the upper surface or a game ball that reached the first big prize opening 50 enters the first big winning opening 50, and this game ball is detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 50a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for the game ball, and also opens and closes a specific area that can be moved in the front and rear directions. A member 52, a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, and a specific area detection switch 53a (see FIG. 5) that detects a game ball that has entered (entered) the specific area 53. By moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 toward the front (winning restriction position), the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state, and by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the specific area 53 is changed to a closed state. A flow path switching solenoid 52b for converting the region 53 into an open state and an outlet 54 through which game balls that have not flowed into the specific region 53 flow are provided.

Then, when a game ball passes (enters) a specific area 53 that is in an open state during a small winning game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, no prize ball will be awarded. After the small winning game ends, a jackpot game to be described later is executed.

In addition, without providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a is set as the specific area, and the first large winning hole is opened during the small winning game described later. A jackpot game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small jackpot game ends by detecting the game ball that has flowed into the jackpot by the first jackpot detection switch 50a.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game and a small win game that change the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but when a jackpot game is treated as a special game and a small win game is treated as a specific game. There is.

In the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e, it is possible or easy to win a prize from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning part 55 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). a second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a second grand prize opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second major winning opening opening/closing member 57. Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a that detects the game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved toward the front (winning regulation position). By doing so, the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and by moving the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the open state. A second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big prize opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening/closing member 57 flows down. When a game ball that has been playing or a game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56 and this game ball is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Balls (for example, 10 game balls) are put out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, the front of the right side gaming area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through, and the back side of the decorative member 91 and the front of the central flow path 91b (first prize opening opening/closing A plurality of front protrusions 91b2 protruding rearward are provided at intervals (directly above the member 51) at intervals. Furthermore, a plurality of rear protrusions 91b1 are provided on the back wall of the central channel 91b (directly above the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91b2, and the rear protrusions 91b1 By forming a meandering flow path with the front protrusion 91b2 and the front protrusion 91b2, the flowing speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the central flow path 91b (particularly on the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) is attenuated. There is. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Furthermore, a plurality of front protrusions 91c2 that protrude rearward are arranged at intervals on the back surface of the decorative member 91 and at a position in front of the first downstream channel 91e (directly above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57). It is set up with a gap between. Furthermore, a plurality of rear protrusions 91c1 are provided on the back wall of the first downstream channel 91e (directly above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91c2. A meandering flow path is formed by the portion 91c1 and the front protrusion 91c2, thereby attenuating the flowing speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow path 91e (particularly the upper surface of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57). It looks like this. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

The game ball launched into the left side game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down via the stage part 42 and is placed below the decorative frame 40. The winnings will be won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, it is possible to win ( pass).

In addition, the game balls fired into the right side game area pass through the upstream flow path 91a, the center flow path 91b (general gate 44), the left side flow path 91c, the right side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, and the first downstream flow path 91e. Flowing down the second downstream channel 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right side gaming area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), The prize will be won in any of the second variable winning parts 55 (second big winning opening 56), or it will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, no prizes are won in the general winning hole 43 or the first starting hole 45 provided in the left side gaming area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the game balls that have been won in the out hole 39. An out ball flow path is provided which accepts and collects out balls made of inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. The game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there is a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, and a second special symbol reservation. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , the second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol, which is performed based on the passing (entering ball) of the game ball to the common symbol gate 44.

Jackpot determination means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, special pattern determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination) This corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) and determining whether to execute a jackpot game or a small win game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 each include a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, small win mode, loss mode).

Note that in this embodiment, a "big hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination. "Jackpot game" means a round game in which the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times ( For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls by playing the game over four or ten times.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the big prize opening. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

Furthermore, "small win" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a small win game (special game) in the jackpot determination. A “small winning game” is a game in which a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) is changed from a closed state to an open state in a manner more disadvantageous than in a big winning game is likely to win prize balls. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the big prize opening in small winning games is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, the predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening. When (for example, 10 balls) wins (balls entered), the small winning game ends. Note that, unlike the jackpot game, the game state does not change just by executing the small win game.

The auxiliary game judgment is based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal pattern judgment, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.). This corresponds to acquiring the information and determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired common figure determination information. Note that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays a normal symbol in a fluctuating manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol to notify the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the auxiliary game determination (win mode or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) in auxiliary game determination. The term "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win a prize (balls entered), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided which have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting port 45. It is for displaying the number of first reservations (U1), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reservations. Although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is for displaying the number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. Although up to four second reservations are stored, there may be fewer or more than four, or the second reservation may not be stored.

The normal symbol reservation display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and displays the number of ordinary symbols pending, which is the number of ordinary symbols determination information (general symbols pending) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes through) the ordinary symbol gate 44. It is used to display the number of ordinary drawings, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of pending drawings. In addition, although up to 4 pieces of common picture reservations are stored, it may be fewer or more than 4, or it is also possible not to store common picture reserves.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if it is determined to be a big hit, numbers such as "3" or "7" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if it is determined to be a small win, alphabets such as "A" or "C" will be displayed. If the display is stopped and it is determined that the game has lost, a "-" symbol may be displayed as a stop display, and during a fluctuating display, the lights may be turned off and the "-" symbol may be repeated.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. The LED starts lighting up, continues to light up during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED when the jackpot game ends. For example, if it is a jackpot game with four rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with ten rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that encourages firing the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting) during a jackpot state (special game) or time-saving game state. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is used to indicate that the setting is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later. starts lighting up, and turns off the LED when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, It is now possible to easily check whether there are any. Note that the status confirmation display 68 may be installed at the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and may be installed at other locations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but it is difficult to know which mode it is set to. may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. You can also do the opposite.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the second special symbol reservation display 64, and the number of rounds display 66, the right-handed indicator 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided at the bottom of the production space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable performance device 73 for executing motion performance is provided, and a variable notification LED 59 for reporting the variable display state of the special symbol is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is not being executed, a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed, and the execution of a jackpot game. There is a jackpot performance that takes place during the event.

Furthermore, while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable effect, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, etc. It becomes.

Specifically, the vertical direction is between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a presentation position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (ascending, descending). Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and a variable display area for executing variable effects. A mode display area indicating the production mode related to the above is formed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbol, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, as the effect pattern 70a, a pattern indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode, small win mode). The jackpot mode and the small win mode are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is other modes.

The manner in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is by scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may also be scrolling in the horizontal direction, switching on the spot, rotating (rotating), etc. good.

Also, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device depending on the result of the jackpot determination. 71 is designed to increase the player's expectation that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

The first image display device 70 includes a first pending icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first pending icons (first pending information) corresponding to a first pending number (U1) in a normal gaming state, which will be described later. , a second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2) in a time-saving gaming state to be described later, and a variable performance is being executed. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating the above, the first pending number display area 70E for numerically displaying the first pending number (U1), and the second pending number (U2). A second reservation number display area 70F for numerically displaying is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes, from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area). , a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area), and a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to fourth display section 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display section 70B2 displays the second pending icon. A first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display section 70B3. A first pending icon indicating pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon indicating first pending memory in which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left side, a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 ( The number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4.

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. A second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the third display section 70D3, and a second pending icon in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed thirdly is displayed. A second pending icon indicating pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and is arranged so that it does not rest on or float on the pedestal image. The icon will be displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (production symbol 70a), the first pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70C. The first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70C, and the first special symbol (production symbol 70a) is displayed in a variable manner. The icon disappears (erases) when the process ends.

In addition, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (production symbol 70a), the second pending icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C. ), the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the effect symbols 70a in a variable manner, but either one or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 The effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are movable while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable display of the performance symbol 70a. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined motion, it is possible to perform motion production. Furthermore, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the motion performance. .

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (above) of the first image display device 70 and near the center (downward) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (raise, descend) between the production position (second position) and the current performance position (second position). The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The fluctuation notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED, and is provided with a first fluctuation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second fluctuation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first fluctuation notification LED 59a starts changing the color (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and changes color in response to stopping the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (fluctuation display of the first special symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. The second fluctuation notification LED 59b starts changing color (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, and changes color in response to stopping the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (fluctuation display of the second special symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed.

In addition, the result of the fluctuating display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the statically displayed performance pattern 70a and the first special symbol, and the combination of the statically displayed performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (special game range) may be notified. In addition, the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the second special symbol is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. The results may be notified.

In addition, instead of displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner by the first fluctuation notification LED 59a and the second fluctuation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second special symbol. The two-image display device 71 may be used for variable display.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and a game ball supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage part 96 that stores balls and supplies them to a payout device 95, a main control device 110A with a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A with a built-in payout control board 120, and a production control board 130. A production control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc. are provided.

In addition, an opening/closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. In addition, the production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74). A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching an adjustment mode related to adjustment of the amount of light.

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m that has a main control unit 110m for clearing the stored contents or for determining the level of advantage of the game (jackpot determination). The RWM clear switch 111a inputs a signal to update the set value (probability of determining a jackpot), and inputs a signal to shift to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute a setting. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating a numerical value or performance information (see FIG. 49).

(Game board configuration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a back unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 includes a game board 500a made of transparent resin, on which a game area 5a is formed by the above-mentioned inner rail 35 and outer rail 36, and a window portion that makes the rear visible. .

And, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general prize opening 43, regular gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting opening 45 (first starting opening detection switch 45a), variable Starting part 46 (second starting opening 47, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, The first big prize opening/closing member 51, the first big winning opening/closing solenoid 51b, the specific area 53, the specific area detection switch 53a, the flow path switching solenoid 52b, the discharge port 54), and the second variable winning part 55 (the second A big winning opening 56, a second big winning opening detection switch 56a, a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the above-mentioned main information display 69 is provided outside the gaming area 5a. It is provided.

Further, at the lower right part of the game board 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is affixed is provided so as to be rotatable in the left and right directions with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are provided at four corners of the board 500a, respectively.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated toward the left.

The fixture 503a includes an operation section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operation section to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft section provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. The engaging piece is provided with an engaging piece located on the side, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position) by operating the operating section. There is.

The back unit 501 has a unit base 501a that is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front side and a window portion that makes the rear view visible. , a movable presentation device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. Further, a production control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the first image display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the production control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving parts 503b are provided, respectively, for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixture 503a described above.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are placed in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, a male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. Thereafter, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engagement piece of the fixture 503a enters into the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging pieces are put into the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A and the certification stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. Thereafter, when the engaging pieces are placed in the first state by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixed receiving part 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portions 503b. Thereafter, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of making the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, we have explained how to attach and detach the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3, but the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the panel unit 500.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the locking mechanism. By preventing the panel unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the panel unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when replacing only the panel unit 500, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be explained using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operations), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of payout control commands from the main control board 110. A board 120, a production control board 130 that controls production related to the game based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the production control board 130. It is equipped with 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to send and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is controlled by the production control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted only in one direction to the board 130.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports. It has a length of 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, and a second starting opening opening/closing switch. Solenoid 48b, first big winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, second big winning hole detection switch 56a, second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b , magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64 , normal symbol holding display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control A board 120 and a production control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to games while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. This enables control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and control processing for sending and receiving various control commands. Control processing and control processing for transmitting gaming information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the gaming information output terminal board 90 are performed.

In the "gaming information", the starting hole winning signal, which is output every time a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A symbol confirmation signal that is output every time, a jackpot signal that is output during a jackpot game, an open signal that is output during a round game (opening of the jackpot), and a time-saving game state that will be described later. A security signal that is output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threaten) to the security of the gaming machine 1 occurs, and the like.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls put out from the payout device 95, and a putout ball detection switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage section 96 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows control processing to pay out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing to send a command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, etc. (not shown).
The ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input/output port of the firing control section 122.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized, and fires the ball. When a change in the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is activated so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to fire game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The production control board 130 includes a production control unit 130m that collectively controls the progress of production based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a production control unit 130m that controls image display and other operations based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. It is equipped with

The production control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b in which a production control program is stored, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

A production button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the production control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the production mode of the variable production, control processing for transmitting production control commands based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, and causes the audio output device 9 to display a predetermined sound. and control the output of sounds.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include the frame lighting device 10, the production button drive device 17b (production button drive motor, production button vibration motor), production button light emitting LED 17c, starting port lamp 75, movable production device 73, and the board. A lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Thereby, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the production button driving device 17b, the production button light emitting LED 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable production device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (equivalent to power supply means). The power supply board 160 has a power supply board that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has decreased (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the decrease in power supply voltage (the occurrence of a power outage). It includes a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage), and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (power outage). I can do it.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and the production control board 120 and the production control unit 130m are provided so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage). Backup power may be supplied to the production control section 130m. Further, backup power may be supplied only to either one of the payout control board 120 and the production control unit 130m.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to the ease of winning a game ball into the second starting port 47 include a "normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)" and a "time-saving gaming state."

Note that the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "normal gaming state." Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" means that in the auxiliary game determination that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the probability of being determined to be a hit is 1/256. This refers to a gaming state in which the average time of the fluctuating display of normal symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the event of a winning is set to 0.180 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of being determined to be a hit is set to be as high as 255/256, the average time of fluctuating display of normal symbols is set to approximately 3 seconds, and the probability of being determined to be a hit is set to approximately 3 seconds. In this case, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 6 seconds, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the normal game state, which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), which will be described later, and a "time-saving game state" that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), and the establishment of the first condition (RWM clear is executed, the jackpot game ends). The first special is controlled (without going through the jackpot game) when the number of loss fluctuation displays of the special symbol executed from 0 clearing of the number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the number of times reached the specified number (500 times in this embodiment) A second special time-saving game (controlled without going through the jackpot game) due to the time-saving game state and the special losing special symbol being stopped and displayed as a result of winning a special loss in the jackpot determination and changing the display of the special symbol. The state is set.

Note that the "time-saving gaming state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state". , the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit may be set to be advantageous.

Although the probability of winning in the normal gaming state is 1/256, the probability of winning may be set to 0/256 so that no winning is determined. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the normal game state, and the game ball does not enter the second starting port 47 (win).

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 6(a) shows a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (enters a ball) in the first starting port 45 and/or the second starting port 47 is stored. FIG. 6(b) is a diagram showing the structure of each storage section of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. 6(c) is a diagram showing the determination information storage area, and FIG. This is the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 6(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage part of the ordinary figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information pending storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored. area, a second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and special figure determination information during execution of variable display is stored. The first special symbol determination information storage area and the second special symbol determination information storage area are each divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section.

In addition, the first storage part, the second storage part, the third storage part, and the fourth storage part of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display part 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the section 70B2, the third display section 70B3, and the fourth display section 70B4, respectively. In addition, the first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section, and the fourth storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2, and the second storage icon display area 70D. They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of pieces of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first reservation number (U1), and these special figure determination information A corresponding number of first pending icons will be displayed on the first display section 70B1 to fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of pieces of special figure judgment information (reservation information) stored in the first storage part to fourth storage part of the second special figure judgment information becomes the second reservation number (U2), and the number of pieces corresponding to these judgment information The hold icon is displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), each storage unit includes a random number storage area for jackpot determination for storing random numbers for jackpot determination, and a random number storage for special symbol determination for storing random numbers for special symbol determination. area, a random number storage area for reach determination for storing the random number value for reach determination, and a random number storage area for special figure fluctuation pattern determination for storing the random number value for determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the first special figure determination information holding storage area that does not store the special figure determination information The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smaller number. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest numbered one in which no special figure determination information is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, stores the special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to in order to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is shifted. will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes the normal figure determination information storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44 is stored, and the normal figure determination information storage area The ordinary figure determination information storage area is divided into the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information that is being displayed is stored, and the ordinary figure determination information holding storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, respectively. Note that the number of pieces of ordinary figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the ordinary figure determination information reservation storage area becomes the ordinary figure reservation number.

As shown in FIG. 6(d), each storage unit includes a random number storage area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, and a random number storage area for normal symbol determination for storing random number values for normal symbol determination. and a random number storage area for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern for storing random numbers for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information is acquired, it is acquired in the lowest numbered storage section in which normal pattern judgment information is not stored in the normal pattern judgment information storage area. The normal figure determination information is stored.

In the 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of normal symbols is met, the normal pattern judgment information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information retention storage area is shifted. and will be referenced to execute the fluctuating display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, and a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing to confirm the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the panel unit 500 (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching A drive source initial operation process for initially operating the solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is performed. Note that details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for reach determination, and in step S51, updates the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, Update the initial random value for determining normal symbols.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process moves to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process moves to step S54. If the input does not continue for the predetermined period, there is a possibility of an instantaneous power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily. Assuming that there is a difference, the process moves to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to notify the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process moves to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for waiting for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, it is assumed that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be established, and the process moves to step S58.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining number of payouts specification command is received, the remaining number of payouts specified by the remaining number of payouts specification command is saved, and if the remaining number of payouts specification command is not received, the remaining number of payouts is saved. Save “0” as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here will be referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command to specify the number of payouts in accordance with the remaining number of payouts will be sent to the payout control board 120. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the main RAM 110c is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access, and from then on, power supply is disabled. Wait until it is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but in the event of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed. This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step S12, and performs startup wait processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power is being restored and the process moves to step S17. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process is transferred to step S17. The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power cut during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S19 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value, which is the stage of the advantage level of the game (probability of being judged as a jackpot in jackpot judgment), is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs processing to confirm the setting value. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S24.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S20. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S22. move.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, the checksum is determined to be abnormal, as this is due to the first power-on or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. will be moved.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S22. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to issue an unrecoverable error notification indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a display of an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 displays an unrecoverable error message indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred. This means outputting an error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be performed and the process moves to step S24, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game (initialize the area other than the set value area of the main RAM 110c).

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow Processing is performed to initially operate the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b for a predetermined period of time. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") when the power is turned on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame The lighting device 10 for the board and the lighting device 74 for the panel are fully lit in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71. A display may be displayed to inform you of this.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, processing is performed to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the main RAM 110c on the information display 113, and to finish checking the setting values by operating the setting key switch 112a. .

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing in step S29. Specifically, the various drive sources described above (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second opening/closing opening solenoid 57b) are initialized for a predetermined period of time. Perform processing to make it work. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to terminate the setting confirmation notification and the like and execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, or The lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power outage). This means outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command, which will be described later) to the production control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S33. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, controls the progress of the game (main control) by allowing all interrupts. A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initial setting process is ended.

In other words, from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is finished, the game is in a pre-start state before the game progress control starts, and after the initial setting process is finished, the game progress control is stopped. The game becomes ready for play.

In this way, while changing settings (during setting change mode) or checking settings (during setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, the status confirmation display 68, first image display device 70, second It is possible to recognize that settings are being changed by checking the image display device 71, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 74, and on the back (back side), by checking the information display 113, settings can be changed. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent with information indicating the current gaming state, but after sending the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

Furthermore, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting change flag, it may be possible to prevent unrecoverable error processing from being performed even if the previous power-off occurred while the settings were being changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt processing, after the initialization processing of the main processing is completed, a clock pulse is input at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110. This is executed by controlling the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area in step S100, and performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

The main CPU 110a performs specific random number update processing in step S120. Specifically, random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random values, special pattern fluctuation pattern determination random values, hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination random values are updated. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1 to them. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, processing is performed to update the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. , determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the specific area detection switch 53a, and performs a process of setting predetermined data if there is an input. Note that details of the input control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing in step S300. Specifically, the determination of the special pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the big winning hole. It performs processing such as opening/closing (the first grand prize opening 50 and the second grand prize opening 56), setting the gaming state, etc. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs general electric power control processing in step S400. Specifically, processing such as determination of the obtained normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, variable display of the normal pattern, and opening/closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game) is performed. Note that details of the general electric power control process will be described later.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big prize opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process in step S600. Specifically, various errors (unauthorized winning errors such as a game ball entering the second starting slot 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or a game ball entering the grand prize opening when not in the special game), and various winnings. An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls entered into the mouth does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which abnormal magnetism is detected over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error occurs when the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects an abnormal radio wave for a predetermined period of time, a door open error occurs when the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a occurs while the game progress is being controlled. It is determined whether an error (or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) has occurred, and processing is performed to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the production control board 130. As a result, the production control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

Main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the big winning opening opening/closing data output to the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, and the first special symbol. Display 60, special symbol display data output to the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64 Processing is performed to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing in step S720. Specifically, processing for creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, a port output that outputs signals such as the starting opening opening/closing data and the big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, or outputs signals such as gaming information data created in step S720. Processing, display output processing to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and payout status confirmation to check the payout status of the payout control board 120. Send a specified command to the payout control board 120 or refer to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) to be described later, and issue a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning holes. Processing for transmitting the information to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the main RAM 110c, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole starting hole) during normal gaming state, and the number of outs during normal gaming state. For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the game state. Perform processing.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming performance information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed. By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((number of payouts during normal play ÷ number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the number of base storage areas set in the main RAM 110c is calculated. Performs processing to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in one area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area is provided for the game, and the normal base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data. Note that details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the main RAM 110c, permit interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode) before the start of game progress control, so the payout Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and the system is used to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, the detection signal is inputted from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56. It is determined whether or not the ball has been played, and processing for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the second starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it is a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing normal pattern determination information. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing in step S260, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and predetermined data is set. Note that details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for 3-prize balls by adding data indicating 3-prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-4. If the first pending number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first pending number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first pending number (U1) is updated. A corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S230-3 in the vacant storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal gaming state is currently in progress. If the game is in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9 as pre-reading of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and the process is moved to step S230-9. In this case, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is terminated, assuming that the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is not performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first prefetch process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIG. 26(a) or FIG. 26(b)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure judgment information is selected, and the special figure judgment information acquired this time is used as the first pre-reading process. 1. Before the variable display of a special symbol is performed, a preliminary determination is made and a process is performed to generate a first pre-reading designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (special symbol scheduled fluctuation pattern). Note that details of the preliminary determination table will be described later.

This "first pre-reading designation command" is information that can specify the special pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot judgment, the judgment result of the special symbol, etc. It is also possible to specify the type, the type of jackpot game or small win game (number of rounds), and the various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) in the time saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first pre-read winning designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and even before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first pre-read designation command starts, the jackpot can be achieved across one or more variable displays. A pre-read notice (continuous notice presentation, icon change presentation) that makes the player expect the game to be played will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reservation number (U1) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reservation number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reservation number. Furthermore, the first reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input. If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process moves to step S240-2, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 2-prize ball counter used for 2-prize balls by adding data indicating 2-prize balls, and in step S240-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-4. If the second pending number (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the second pending number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second pending number (U2) and updating it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, the second pending number (U2) is updated. A corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) are displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S240-3 in the empty storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is in progress. If the game is in the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S240-9 to pre-read the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47, and the process is moved to step S240-9. If not, the current second starting port detection switch input process is terminated, assuming that the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is not performed.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines that the remaining number of time reductions (here, the second number of time reductions (J2), not the first number of time reductions (J1) or the third number of time reductions (J3)) is a predetermined number ( For example, 5 times) or more. If the remaining number of time savings is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process moves to step S240-10, and if the remaining number of time savings is not greater than or equal to the predetermined number, acquisition is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47. The current second starting port detection switch input process is ended without pre-reading the special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs a second prefetch process (pre-determination process) in step S240-10. In this second pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIG. 26(c)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure judgment information is selected, and the special figure judgment information acquired this time is displayed as a variable display of the second special symbol. A process is performed to generate a second pre-read designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, pre-read information) before the pre-determination is performed.

This "second pre-read specification command" is information that can specify the judgment result of the special symbol judgment information, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the special It is also possible to specify the type of symbol, the type of jackpot game or small win game (number of rounds), and the various times (J1, J2, J3) in the normal time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second pre-read designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the jackpot game is started over one or more variable displays even before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second pre-read designation command starts. A look-ahead notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) that makes people expect that it will be executed will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the second reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second number of reservations may be made smaller than the upper limit value of the first number of reservations. Furthermore, the second reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
The specific area detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process moves to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input Finish the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current period is a specific area valid period in which passage of the game ball to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small winning game (conversion game) is in progress. If the small winning game is in progress, the process moves to step S260-3, and if the specific area is not within the valid period, the process moves to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and a specific area passing flag indicating the gaming state when the game ball passes the specific area 53. Setting game state information when passing through the area (information indicating that the current state is the normal gaming state, information indicating that the current state is the normal gaming state, information indicating that the current state is the time-saving gaming state, if the current state is the time-saving gaming state) in the main RAM 110c, In step S260-4, a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the specific area valid period is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current specific area detection switch input Finish the process.

Thereby, a specific area passing designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing notification performance is executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a jackpot game is executed). Therefore, the player can understand that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and Detection switch input processing ends.

Thereby, a specific area passing error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing error notification performance is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. Therefore, the employees of the game parlor can understand the occurrence of a passing error and can take appropriate measures.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the process for starting the variable display of special symbols based on the reserved memory (special figure judgment information) and the special figure special electric line processing data are changed to "1". A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed to perform the process and the like.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 1, the special figure special electric line processing data and the process for stopping and displaying the special symbol and transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 130 as the variable time elapses are changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) is executed to perform processing and the like.
If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss, and the opening time of the jackpot game will be set if it is a jackpot special symbol, depending on the elapse of the stop time of the special symbol. Then, the special pattern special electricity processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small hit special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set, and the special pattern stop processing to change the special pattern special electricity processing data to "4" ( Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric line processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing (for performing the process for executing the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round game) Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 4, the processing for executing the small winning game or the process of changing the special figure special electric processing data to ``0'' or ``3'' based on the completion of the ending of the small winning game are performed. A small winning game process (step S350) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 5, the jackpot game ending process is performed to perform the process for ending the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second held count (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second pending number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, specifies the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the second pending number (U2) after the subtraction. The command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the second special figure determination information storage area. A shift process is performed on the stored data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first number of reservations (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first number of reservations (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, issues a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to . As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second reservation number is changed to the first reservation number). However, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information retention storage area or the second special figure determination information retention storage area was shifted (first The number of reservations and the second number of reservations may be subtracted in the winning order), or the first special figure determination information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the first number of reservations may be subtracted). It may be preferentially subtracted from the second reservation number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special symbol data of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. Execute jackpot determination processing. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern variation pattern determination process that determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. You can.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot check to determine whether or not it is a big hit (or not). Select the judgment table (see FIG. 17). The details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (or not). If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, performs special symbol determination for the jackpot to determine the type of the jackpot special symbol. The table (see FIG. 18(a)) is selected, and the process moves to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for jackpot will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small hit, the process moves to step S311-7, and if it is not a small hit, it is assumed that there is a loss and the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small winning (see FIG. 18(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small winning, and moves the process to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for small winning will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a compares the current set value and random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a special loss. If it is a special loss, the process moves to step S311-9, and if it is a normal loss, which is not a special loss, the process moves to step S311-10.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for special loss (see FIG. 18(c)) for determining the type of special loss special symbol, and moves the process to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for special losses will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the normal loss special symbol determination table (see FIG. 18(d)) for determining the normal loss special symbol, and moves the process to step S311-11. The details of the special symbol determination table for normal losses will be described later.

In step S311-11, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination against the special symbol determination table. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

In step S311-12, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

In this way, when the special loss (time saving) is won, the special loss special symbol is determined from the special symbol determination table for the special loss (time saving). Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from a normal loss, and when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can be informed that the second special time-saving game state will occur, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 17(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 17(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the random value for jackpot determination, and the determination result (jackpot, special loss, normal loss). For reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" and "special loss" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 17(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. Based on the numerical value, it is determined whether it is a "big hit," "special loss," or "normal loss."

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 100 random numbers for jackpot determination from "2000" to "2099" are determined to be "special losses", and other random numbers for jackpot determination are determined to be "losses".

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 18(a) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 18(b) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining a special symbol to stop when a jackpot is determined. 18(c) is a special symbol determination table for a small win that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the special symbol is determined to be a special loss. This is a special symbol determination table for a special loss, and FIG. 18(d) is a special symbol determination table for a normal loss that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a normal loss.

As shown in FIGS. 18(a) to 18(d), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random number value for special symbol determination, the determination result of special symbol determination, and this determination. The stop special symbol data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated, and the lighting mode of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are normal loss special symbols in which no jackpot game is executed. The special symbol "01" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of three round games, and the special symbol "02" executes the second jackpot game consisting of three round games. The special symbol "03" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of 3 round games, and the special symbol "11" is a special jackpot symbol consisting of 10 round games. This is a jackpot symbol for executing the fourth jackpot game. In addition, the special symbol "12" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games, and the special symbol "13" is a special small jack symbol that executes the first small jackpot game. The special symbol "14" is a small winning special symbol that executes the second small winning game, and the special symbol "15" is a small winning special symbol that executes the third small winning game. ing. The special symbols "20", "21", "30", and "31" are special loss special symbols in which no jackpot game is executed.

Although details will be described later, the advantageous degree of the various jackpot games is as follows: 3rd jackpot game < 1st jackpot game < 2nd jackpot game < 4th jackpot game = 5th jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the types of jackpot special symbols, small win special symbols, special loss special symbols, and normal loss special symbols are the same without changing depending on the setting value. can be mentioned. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, at least one of the jackpot special symbol and the small prize special symbol may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the selection percentage of various losing symbols, the selection percentage of various jackpot special symbols, and the selection percentage of various small winning symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. can be mentioned. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) on the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a jackpot special symbol is greater than the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) that light up when displaying a jackpot special symbol. One point is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand the type of special symbol being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that when displaying a normal loss special symbol, the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a small winning special symbol is One point is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand the type of special symbol being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display that light up when displaying a special symbol that is usually a loser is greater than the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) that are lit when displaying a special symbol that is a loser. One point is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand the type of special symbol being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the LED (light-emitting member) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a small winning special symbol also lights up when displaying a losing special symbol. One point is that it includes the same LED (light emitting member) as the special symbol display. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol is a small win special symbol or a loss special symbol, rather than a jackpot special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 18 is that the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45 is determined to be a jackpot (first result). If it is determined, it is possible to execute any of the first to third jackpot games, and the special figure judgment information (second special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 47 is a jackpot. (First result), one of the fourth to fifth jackpot games can be executed. By doing this, the type of jackpot game that can be executed changes depending on the type of special symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

Further, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the jackpot special symbol may be greater than or less than three. In addition, the number of LEDs on the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol may be greater than or equal to two, but even in this case, the number of LEDs on the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol may be increased or decreased. The number may be different from the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying.

In addition, the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a small winning special symbol and the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a loss special symbol are not included (if they are completely different) You may also do so.

Further, although the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is designed not to win a small hit, it may be possible to win a small hit. In this case, it is preferable that the winning probability is lower than that in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-2, and if it is not the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-3, assuming that it is the time-saving gaming state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding table (matching the gaming situation) from the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 20) for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects a table corresponding to (matches the gaming situation) from the time-saving special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 21 to 25) for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the time-saving gaming state. is selected, and the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, the number of reservations (U1 or U2), and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The special figure variation pattern is determined by comparing it with the special figure variation pattern determination table.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for determining a variation production pattern which is a production mode of the variation production is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a selects the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, specifically, the special number executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, clearing the number of fluctuations to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game). Update the number of symbol fluctuation displays by +1. The number of variations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a variable display of the first special symbol, or a variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, this number of fluctuations will be referred to in the special symbol fluctuation processing described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is present. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is ended, and if it is in the time-saving game state, in step S313-9, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining time-saving number is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified. When this process is finished, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability variable gaming state (high probability time-saving gaming state) where the probability of being judged as a jackpot is higher than the normal gaming state is not generated, the number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of the gaming state. However, if you want to generate a variable probability gaming state that is different from the normal time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (for example, after the end of the second jackpot game), the number of fluctuations in the variable probability gaming state will be updated. It is best to avoid doing so.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal use)
FIG. 20 is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state.

Specifically, in FIG. 20(a), there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or there is jackpot history information and the number of changes to the first special time-saving gaming state is 51 or more. Or, use up the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol after the end of the normal time-saving game state (rush battle mode to be described later) in which the number of times of time reduction (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 7 times. This is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 that is sometimes referred to when performing a fluctuation display (performance modes A to C), and FIG. 20(b) shows that there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the first This is a normal special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when performing a fluctuation display (during a countdown mode to be described later) when the number of fluctuations up to the special time saving game state is 50 times or less.

In addition, FIG. 20(c) shows that the normal time saving game state (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode, which will be described later) in which the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 55 times or more is the time saving number (J1 to A normal special symbol that is referenced when executing a variable display when extinguishing the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol after normal termination when any of J3) becomes "0". FIG. 20(d) is a figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3, and FIG. ) after the puncture ends because the number of time reductions does not become "0" and the remaining number of small wins becomes "0", or after the first special time reduction game state ends, or after the second special time reduction This is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 4 that is referred to when performing a fluctuation display when exhausting the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol after the gaming state ends.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal time saving and 2nd special time saving)
FIGS. 21 to 24 are special symbol variation pattern determination tables for normal time saving and second special time saving that are referred to when determining the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal time saving gaming state and the second special time saving gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) shows the normal time-saving game state and the second special when the time-saving number (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 7 and the remaining number of small wins is 1. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal time saving and second special time saving that is referred to when executing a variation display before the final time saving variation in the time saving gaming state (during rush battle mode described later), FIG. 21(b) shows the normal time saving game state and the second special time saving game state when the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 7 times and the remaining number of small hits is 1. This is a special figure variation pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving and second special time saving that is referred to when executing the final time saving variation (during the rush battle mode described later).

FIG. 22(a) shows the normal time-saving game state when the time-saving number (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 55, 95, or 496 and the remaining number of small wins is 1. This is a normal time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 3 that is referred to when displaying a variation before the final time-saving variation (during the wild dance mode described later), and FIG. When the time saving final variation is executed in the normal time saving gaming state when the time saving number (J2) is set to 55, 95 or 496 and the remaining number of small wins is 1 (Ranbu mode described later) This is the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 4 for normal time saving referred to in (middle).

Figure 23(a) shows the normal time saving game state when the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is 2, and is before the time saving final fluctuation. 23(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 5 for normal time saving that is referred to when performing a variation display (during Super Ranbu mode described later), and FIG. 23(b) shows the number of time savings (J2) of the second special symbol. is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins is 2, the normal time saving game mode is in the normal time saving gaming state, and when executing the time saving final display (during the super random dance mode described later), the normal time saving time display is referred to. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 6.

Figure 24(a) shows the normal time saving game state when the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol is set to 496 and the remaining number of small wins is 2, and is before the time saving final variation. 24(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 7 for normal time saving that is referred to when performing a variation display (during infinite mode described later), and FIG. 24(b) shows that the number of time savings (J2) of the second special symbol is This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 8 for normal time saving that is referred to when executing the time saving final fluctuation (during infinite mode described later) when the number of small wins is set to 496 and the remaining number of small hits is 2. .

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for 1st special time saving)
FIG. 25 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the first special time saving that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the first special time saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 25(a) shows the first special time-saving gaming state when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the remaining number of small wins is 2. The first special time-saving special feature is referred to when performing the second and subsequent variable displays from the start of the first special time-saving gaming state (during infinite mode, which will be described later). FIG. 25(b) is a figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1, and FIG. 25(b) is the first special time-saving gaming state when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the remaining number of small wins is 2, and the time-saving first fluctuation 25(c) is the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for the first special time saving that is referred to when executing (during infinite mode), and FIG. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for the first special time saving that is referred to when performing a variable display in the first special time saving game state (during the wild dance mode to be described later).

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs variable display, the determination result of jackpot determination, and the determination result of special symbol (stop special symbol data ), the random number for reach determination, the first reservation number (U1) or the second reservation number (U2), the random number for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, the special symbol fluctuation pattern as a determination result, and the special symbol. It is associated with the variable time, and the content of the variable effect is described for reference.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify at least the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

As for the production contents shown in the special symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, "normal variation", "shortened variation", and "ultra shortened variation" are the three production symbols 70a that vary at high speed and vary apart. , which means stopping without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a in the left and right regions is "7". This refers to a mode in which the display is temporarily stopped at , and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

"Temporary stop" means that the performance symbol 70a slightly swings or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (not completely stopped). ) Refers to the aspect.

"Normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and is a reach with the lowest expectation of jackpot. It has become. In addition, in this embodiment, although a jackpot does not occur with "normal reach", it may be configured such that a jackpot occurs with "normal reach".

"SP Reach" is a super reach performance that is performed after the normal reach and has higher expectations for a jackpot than the normal reach.

"SPSP Reach" is a special reach effect that is performed after the normal reach or after the super reach, and has higher expectations for a jackpot than the super reach. For example, the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special performance more than “SP reach”.

"Full rotation reach" is a reach that is performed after a normal reach or a super reach, and is a reach that guarantees a jackpot. For example, from the blackout effect, the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and move at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a more special effect than "SPSP Reach." ing.

"Chance production" means that the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed without the reach production, indicating that it is a chance for the second special time-saving gaming state to occur, and also indicating whether the second special time-saving gaming state will occur. It is designed to perform a performance to inform you whether or not it is possible.

"Super shortening fluctuation after result" means that in the first fluctuation display in the normal gaming state that is performed following the final fluctuation display in the normal time-saving gaming state, from the normal gaming state or special time-saving gaming state called the so-called first win. Displays the results of games during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving gaming state continues with the jackpot game as a trigger (does not include the number of prize balls and the number of acquisitions, etc., which are the results of playing in the special time-saving gaming state before the jackpot game) The effect is such that only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed while the result display is being performed.

"Post-Result Resurrection Long Variation" refers to the first variation display in the normal gaming state that is performed following the final variation display in the normal time-saving gaming state, when the special symbol TZ is displayed while the aforementioned result display is being performed. The effect is such that only a variable display is performed, and a revival display is performed that suggests a result (big win or small win) that is advantageous to the player.

"Post-result revival fluctuation" refers to the fluctuation of the special symbol TZ in the first fluctuation display in the normal gaming state that is performed following the final fluctuation display in the normal time-saving gaming state, with the result display described above being performed. Only the display is performed, and the resurrection display is shorter than the result revival long fluctuation.

"Time-saving return performance after result" refers to the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) in the normal gaming state, which is performed following the final variable display of the normal time-saving gaming state. Only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed in the state where the above-mentioned result display is performed, and a return display to return to the time-saving game state (second special time-saving game state) is performed.

"Super shortening fluctuation after shutter" refers to the fluctuation display before the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state, or the fluctuation display of the final round of the first special time-saving gaming state, or the final rounding of the second special time-saving gaming state. In the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state that is performed following the variable display, a shutter display (end suggestion display) indicating the end of the time-saving gaming state is performed. The effect is such that only the special symbol TZ is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

"Post-shutter revival long fluctuation" means the fluctuation display before the final round of the normal time-saving game state, or the fluctuation display of the last round of the first special time-saving game state, or the last round of the second special time-saving game state. In the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state that is performed following the variable display, a shutter display (end suggestion display) indicating the end of the time-saving gaming state is performed. In this state, only the special symbol TZ fluctuation display is performed, and when the game returns to the normal gaming state, a resurrection display is performed that suggests an advantageous result to the player (big win or small win). There is.

"Post-shutter revival fluctuation" means the fluctuation display before the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state, or the fluctuation display of the final round of the first special time-saving gaming state, or the fluctuation display of the final round of the second special time-saving gaming state. In the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, which is performed following the fluctuation display, a shutter display (end suggestion display) indicating the end of the time-saving gaming state is performed. In this state, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed, and the resurrection display is shorter than the long fluctuation after the shutter.

"Time-saving return performance after shutter" refers to the variable display before the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state, or the fluctuating display at the final round of the first special time-saving gaming state, or the final round of the second special time-saving gaming state. In the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state that is performed following the variable display, a shutter display (end suggestion display) indicating the end of the time-saving gaming state is performed. In this state, only a variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed, and a return display to return to the time-saving game state (second special time-saving game state) is performed.

"Rush Battle Reach" refers to whether a battle between an ally character and an enemy character will enter Ranbu Mode, Super Ranbu Mode, or Infinite Mode (which will be a loss, a big hit, or a small win). It is an exciting reach performance. Note that the modes are advantageous to the player in the order of wild dance mode < super wild dance mode < infinite mode.

"Rewriting effect" means that it is a chance to rewrite the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol that is displayed on the image display device without a reach effect, and also ) increases, a rewriting success display is performed, and when the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol does not increase, a rewriting failure display is performed.

"Final Battle Reach" refers to whether or not the friendly character and enemy character will have a final battle and enter the Ranbu Mode, Super Ranbu Mode, or Infinite Mode (described below) (either a loss, a big hit, or a small win). ) is a reach performance that encourages.

The "promotional battle promotion fluctuation" is a production in which the battle does not take place after the friendly character and the enemy character have incited whether or not to engage in a battle.

"Promotion Battle Reach" is a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, and determines whether or not they will be promoted from Ranbu Mode to Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode (which will be a loss, a big hit, or a small win). It is an exciting reach performance.

"Result fluctuation" refers to the result of gaming during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving gaming state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal gaming state or special time-saving gaming state called the first win (the special time-saving gaming before the jackpot game) The result display is performed to display the result of the game (not including the number of prize balls, the number of acquisitions, etc.).

"Result revival fluctuation" refers to the gaming results during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving gaming state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal gaming state or special time-saving gaming state called the so-called first hit (the special time-saving before the jackpot game). A resurrection display that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player (big win or small win) after starting the result display (not including the number of prize balls, the number of wins, etc. that are the results of the game in the gaming state) It is a performance that will be held.

"Continuous Battle Reach" is a reach that incites whether or not Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode (described later) will continue (either a loss, a big hit, or a small win) by a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. It is staged.

The "undefeated battle inciting variation" is a production in which a battle does not take place after the friendly character and the enemy character incite whether or not to engage in a battle.

"Undefeated Battle Reach" is a reach effect that suggests that when an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle, the ally character always wins and the result is advantageous to the player (big win or small win). .

"(Entry performance) long fluctuation" means, if it is the first fluctuation of the first special time-saving game state, it is a performance that results in a loss after the entry performance that suggests entering the first special time-saving game state is performed. If there is, and it is not the first variation of the first special time-saving game state (it is the second or subsequent variation display), the entry performance is not performed and it is a performance that results in a loss.

"(Entry performance) Immediate winning variation" means, if it is the first variation of the first special time-saving game state, the "(entering effect) immediate winning variation" means that after the entry effect that suggests entering the first special time-saving game state is performed, the change occurs via reach. If the first special time-saving game state does not change for the first time (this is the second or subsequent change display), This is a performance in which the player is notified of an advantageous result (big win or small win) without going through the reach without performing a rush performance.

"(Entering Effect) Undefeated Battle Reach" means, in the case of the first variation of the first special time-saving game state, the above-mentioned undefeated battle after the entry effect suggesting entry into the first special time-saving game state is performed. If the first special time-saving game state does not fluctuate for the first time (it is the second or subsequent fluctuation display), then the above-mentioned undefeated battle reach will be performed without the rush performance. It has become.

"Long entry performance variation" is a performance that results in a loss after the entry performance suggesting entry into the first special time saving game state is performed in the first variation of the first special time saving game state.

"Reach variation without entry effect" means a jackpot or small hit after a reach effect is performed without performing an entry effect suggesting entry into the first special time saving gaming state in the first variation of the first special time saving gaming state. This is the performance.

The first feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the number of time reductions (J1 -J3) becomes "0" and becomes the final round of fluctuating display, a fluctuating performance in which a result is displayed is executed. By doing so, the player can check the results of the games during a series of advantageous periods, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the games.

The second feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that during the fluctuation display that is the final round of the first special time-saving game state that does not go through the jackpot game, no result display is performed. One point is that a variable effect is executed in which a shutter display (end suggestion display) indicating the end of the time-saving gaming state is performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied with the display of the results of games during a series of advantageous periods even though no jackpot games have been executed, and to increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

The third feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) is determined before the number of time reductions (J1 to J3) reaches "0" in the normal time reduction gaming state. During the variable display that is performed after the normal time-saving gaming state ends when the value becomes "0", there is a variable display in which a shutter display (end suggestion display) indicating the end of the time-saving gaming state is performed without displaying the result. There are several points that are implemented. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied with the display of the gaming results during a series of advantageous periods even though the normal time-saving gaming state has ended. It becomes possible to improve interest.

The fourth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that different special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables are used to display fluctuations in the normal time-saving gaming state and the first special time-saving gaming state. One point is that this is possible. In this way, even if they are in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents can be made different between the normal time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that in the first fluctuation during the first special time-saving gaming state, special symbol fluctuation pattern determination differs depending on the presence or absence of jackpot history (RWM clear). One point is that it is possible to perform variable display using a table. By doing so, the performance content during the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that in the second to final fluctuations during the first special time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), One point is that it is possible to perform a variable display using a common special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and also to realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

The seventh feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that when a jackpot occurs during the first special time-saving gaming state, it is easier to achieve a jackpot during the first special time-saving gaming state than when the jackpot occurs during the normal gaming state. One of the points is that a variation pattern with a short variation time (immediate winning variation where no reach effect is executed) is easily determined. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in situations where the first special time-saving game state occurs and the jackpot game is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Become.

The eighth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that when a jackpot occurs during the normal time-saving game state or during the second special time-saving game state, it is more likely to occur during the first special time-saving game state. In the case of a jackpot, it is easier to determine a variation pattern with a short variation time (immediate winning variation where no reach effect is executed). By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in situations where the first special time-saving game state occurs and the jackpot game is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Become.

As a ninth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25, the first special time saving pattern is displayed more quickly than the case where the fluctuation display is executed during the normal time saving gaming state or the second special time saving gaming state. One point is that the average fluctuation time is shorter when the fluctuation display is executed during the gaming state. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in situations where the first special time-saving game state occurs and the jackpot game is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Become.

The tenth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state (after the normal end due to the number of time-savings becoming "0"), Different fluctuation pattern determination tables (different fluctuation patterns) are used for the specific period after the end of the 1st special time-saving gaming state (the expiration period for the remaining reservation of the 2nd special symbol). One point is that it is possible to perform variable display using By doing so, different aftereffects can be given to the player when the normal time-saving game state ends and when the first special time-saving game state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the game is in the same normal game state, the content of the performance can be varied depending on the previous game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 25 is that the specific period after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state (after the end of the puncture due to the remaining number of small wins becoming "0") (expiration period of the remaining reservation of the second special symbol) and a specific period after the end of the first special time-saving gaming state (expiration period of the remainder reservation of the second special symbol), the same fluctuation pattern judgment table (the same fluctuation pattern ) can be used to display fluctuations. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the variable pattern determination table (variable pattern), and to make the control at the end of the time-saving gaming state more efficient. Furthermore, even if a different time-saving game state ends, the same normal game state performance is performed for a specific period, so the performance can be performed in a natural flow and the interest of the game can be improved.

Although it is possible to use different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables during the normal time-saving gaming state and during the first special time-saving gaming state, for example, variations other than the initial variation and final variation in the first special time-saving gaming state When executing the display, use the special figure variation pattern determination table for normal time saving (for example, special figure variation pattern judgment table 3 for normal time saving, special figure variation pattern judgment table 5 for normal time saving, or normal You may make it use the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table 7 etc. for time saving). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and also to realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, for the first fluctuation during the first special time-saving gaming state, different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables are used depending on the presence or absence of jackpot history (RWM clear), but the same special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, You may make it use the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for 1st special time saving or the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for 1st special time saving. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and also to realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, in the final variation during the first special time-saving game state, the same special pattern variation pattern judgment table is used regardless of whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), but a different special pattern variation pattern judgment table is used. You may also use it. By doing so, it is possible to vary the presentation content during the final variable display in the first special time-saving game state depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the end of the normal time-saving game state (after the normal end due to the number of time-savings becoming "0"), there is a specific period (period for extinguishing the remaining reservation of the second special symbol) and the end of the first special time-saving game state. A different special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table is used in the later specific period (expiration period of the remaining reservation of the second special symbol), but the same special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table (special pattern fluctuation pattern) is used to determine the special pattern. It may also be possible to perform a variable display of. In this case, the regular special pattern variation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 20(a), the regular special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 3 shown in FIG. 20(c), and the regular special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 3 shown in FIG. The special symbol variation display may be executed using any one of the regular special symbol variation pattern determination tables 4. However, although the result is displayed after the normal time-saving game state ends (after normal end), it is preferable not to display the result after the first special time-saving game state ends.

In addition, after the end of the normal time-saving game state (after the end of the puncture due to the remaining number of small wins becoming "0"), there is a specific period (period for extinguishing the remaining reservation of the second special symbol) and the first special time-saving game state. Although the same special pattern fluctuation pattern table is used during the specific period after the end of the second special pattern (the expiration period for the remaining reservation of the second special symbol), a different special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table (special pattern fluctuation pattern) is used for the special pattern fluctuation pattern. A variable display of symbols may be performed. In this case, during a specific period after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state (after the puncture ends), the special symbol fluctuation display is executed using the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 3 shown in FIG. 20(c). However, during a specific period after the end of the first special time-saving game state, the special symbol variation display may be executed using the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table 4 shown in FIG. 20(d). . However, although the result is displayed after the normal time-saving game state ends (after normal end), it is preferable not to display the result after the first special time-saving game state ends.

In addition, it is possible to use the same special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (normal special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1) in the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state, but in the second special time-saving game state. A dedicated special symbol variation pattern determination table (special symbol variation pattern) may be provided to display variations in special symbols, or the same special symbol may be used in the first special time-saving gaming state and the second special time-saving gaming state. You may make it perform the variable display of a special symbol using a variation pattern determination table (special symbol variation pattern). In this case, it is preferable to execute the variable display of the special symbols using the first special time saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 3 shown in FIG. 25(c).

In addition, for the first fluctuation in the second special time-saving gaming state, the same special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table was used regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), but depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear) You may make it use a different special figure fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, if there is no jackpot history, the normal special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 20(a) is used, while if there is a jackpot history, the normal However, even if there is no jackpot history, if there is a small win history (such as cases where a small winning game was executed but a jackpot game was not executed) , you may make it use the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal use of FIG.20(b).

In addition, in the first special time-saving game state, if there is no jackpot history, the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for the first special time-saving shown in FIG. 25(a) is used, while if there is a jackpot history, the 25(b), the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for the first special time saving was used, but even if there is no jackpot history, the small winning history (a small winning game was executed but a jackpot game was not executed) If there is a case where it is not done, etc., the first special time saving special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 25(b) may be used.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 26 is a preliminary determination table that is referred to when pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the starting slot.

Specifically, FIG. 26(a) shows a case where the main RAM 110c is in the normal gaming state and there is no jackpot history information, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of fluctuations up to the first special time-saving gaming state is 51. This is the normal preliminary determination table 1 that is referred to when the above is the case, and FIG. 26(b) shows the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state, when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, and up to the first special time-saving gaming state. 26(c) is a normal preliminary determination table 2 that is referred to when performing a variable display when is 50 times or less, and FIG. 26(c) is a time-saving preliminary determination table that is referred to when in a time-saving gaming state. It is.

As shown in FIG. 26, the preliminary determination table includes the gaming state, the type of special symbol (starting hole), the determination result of jackpot determination (random value for jackpot determination), and the determination result of special symbol (special symbol determination). random number), a random number for reach determination, a random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern as a determination result are associated.

Therefore, the "scheduled special pattern fluctuation pattern" and "pre-read information" can be said to be things that can identify at least the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed. . Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination process has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2, and if the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process ends.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbols determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3, sets a stop time corresponding to the gaming situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if it is a variable display of the final round of the time saving game state, 8.0 seconds is set, and if it is a variable display other than that, 0.5 seconds is set.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time-saving flag (any one of the normal time-saving flag, the first special time-saving flag, and the second special time-saving flag) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining number of working hours is to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5; if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining number of working hours is not to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5. The process moves to S320-13.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time saving number (J1) which is the time saving number of the first special symbol saved in the main RAM 110c, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored in the main RAM 110c. The third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of time saving symbols, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), it is saved in the main RAM 110c in step S320-7. The second time saving number (J2), which is the number of time saving times of the second special symbol, and the third time saving number (J3) mentioned above are subtracted by one.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether any one of the first number of time reductions (J1), the second number of time reductions (J2), and the third number of time reductions (J3) has become "0". If it becomes "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S320-12, and if it does not become "0", the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S320-13, and if it is a small winning special symbol, in step S320-10, the small winning amount is saved in the main RAM 110c until the time saving gaming state is ended. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of hits (Z).

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins has become "0". If the remaining number of small wins has become "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S320-12, and if the remaining number of small wins has not become "0", step S320 Processing moves to -13.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a saves the time saving flag (ordinary time saving flag, first special time saving flag, or second special time saving flag) saved in the main RAM 110c and the various number of time saving times (J1, J2, J3). Clear the time saving game state.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S320-15, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-14, the time saving flag saved in the main RAM 110c and the various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) to end the time saving gaming state (starting the normal gaming state). When this process is finished, the process moves to step S320-22.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a determines that the number of changes saved in the main RAM 110c has reached the specified number (496 times, which is the maximum number of time-savings in the normal time-saving gaming state + 500 times, which is set to the remaining number of reservations of 4). Determine whether it has been reached. If the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the first special time-saving game state is started and the process moves to step S320-16, and if the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the first special time-saving game state is started. Assuming that the gaming state is not to be started, the process moves to step S320-18.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a saves the number of time reductions for the first special time reduction (J1 = 60, J2 = 750, J3 = 750) and the remaining number of small wins (Z = 2) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S320 -17, the first special time-saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c to shift to the first special time-saving game state.

In step S320-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a special loss special symbol (usually a loss special symbol), the second special time-saving game state is not started and the process moves to step S320-21, and if it is a special loss special symbol, step S320- Processing moves to step 19.

In step S320-19, the main CPU 110a saves the number of time reductions for the second special time reduction (J1 = 60, J2 = 10, J3 = 12) and the remaining number of small wins (Z = 1) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S320 -20, a second special time-saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c to shift to a second special time-saving game state.

In step S320-21, the main CPU 110a sets time saving number designation commands corresponding to the various time saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) saved in the main RAM 110c in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified.

In step S320-22, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and in step S320-23, the main CPU 110a sets the gaming state corresponding to the current gaming state (the gaming state identified from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag). The specified command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state. When this process is finished, this special symbol variation process ends.

In this way, when any of the various time saving times (J1 to J3) becomes "0" during the time saving gaming state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47, the remaining number of small wins (Z) The time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) ends even if the time-saving game state does not become "0". Therefore, the time-saving game state can be ended according to the progress of the game (execution status of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if there is no second pending number when changing from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state and a variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the first pending memory, the time-saving gaming state Since the number of variable displays of the second special symbol (the number of times of J2) that you want to perform can be performed to the maximum, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47, various time saving times (J1, J2, J3 ) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, the player tries to proceed with the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the types of special symbols (combinations of the effects patterns 70a) that are stopped and displayed (by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in the small winning game). Whether the player is aiming for a jackpot or not, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of small wins remaining (Z) remains, the time-saving gaming state will end when the various time-saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) become "0". ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving game state from continuing until the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, and giving the player an excessive advantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbol is displayed as a loss fluctuation display after the first condition is satisfied (RWM clear) reaches the specified number of times (the predetermined number of times the special symbol fluctuation display is a loss result), and The number of times the special symbol loss fluctuation display executed after the second condition is satisfied (the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0) reaches the specified number of times (the special symbol fluctuation display for the predetermined number of times is a loss result) 1), it is possible to generate the first special time-saving game state for a predetermined period (until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 750 times). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the surprise that a time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the number of fluctuations (500 times) that the first special time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum number of time-savings (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, the normal time-saving game state is Since the first special time-saving game state does not occur during the game, the inconvenience that the player loses track of the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations in which the first special time-saving game state occurs (500 times) is greater than the maximum number of time-savings (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state by the upper limit number of the second pending number (4 pieces). Because of the number, if the maximum number of time savings (496 times) is set in the normal time saving game state, it will feel as if the normal time saving game state has directly transitioned to the first special time saving game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the first special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to zero. Therefore, between jackpot games (after the special time-saving gaming state starts or ends), the first special time-saving gaming state will not occur again, and it is possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor and the player. This also makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of special symbols, if a special losing special symbol that is different from the normal losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of time savings in the normal time saving gaming state (J2 = 7 times / 55 times / 95 times / 496 It is possible to generate the second special time-saving gaming state over a period (J2=10 times) different from the period (J2=10 times). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the surprise that a time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it becomes easier to distinguish from the normal time-saving game state via the jackpot game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of setting the maximum number of times in the normal time-saving game state (J2 = 496 times) to be less than the number of fluctuations (500 times) at which the first special time-saving game state occurs, The maximum time saving number and the variable number of times that the first special time saving game state occurs may be the same number of times. In this way, the normal time-saving gaming state and the first special time-saving gaming state will be seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the normal time-saving gaming state has been extended, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, the maximum number of time saving times (J2=496 times) in the normal time saving game state may be set to be larger than the variable number of times (500 times) that the first special time saving game state occurs. In this case, instead of causing the normal time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state to overlap (in parallel), it is preferable to switch from the normal time-saving game state to the first special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving gaming state, and it also becomes easier for the player to understand the gameplay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the first special time-saving game state is in progress, when the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to generate the second special time-saving game state, but the first special time-saving game state If the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed during the game state, instead of causing the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state to overlap, the second special time-saving game state is not generated and the second special time-saving game state is not generated. 1. The special time saving game state may be continued. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving gaming state, and it also becomes easier for the player to understand the gameplay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the normal time-saving game state was in progress, it was possible to generate the second special time-saving game state when the special losing special symbol was stopped and displayed. When the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, instead of causing the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state to overlap, the normal time-saving game state is continued without generating the second special time-saving game state. You may also do so. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving gaming state, and it also becomes easier for the player to understand the gameplay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the normal time-saving game state was in progress, it was possible to generate the second special time-saving game state when the special losing special symbol was stopped and displayed. When the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to switch from the normal time-saving game state to the second special time-saving game state instead of causing the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state to overlap. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving gaming state, and it also becomes easier for the player to understand the gameplay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special losing special symbol (for example, a special symbol in which the second time saving number of times = 10 times is set) is stopped and displayed during the normal time saving gaming state, the second special time saving gaming state will not occur and the normal If the time-saving game state is continued and the second special loss special symbol (for example, a special symbol in which the second time-saving number of times = 20 times is set) is stopped and displayed during the normal time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state will be changed from the normal time-saving game state. It may be possible to switch to the special time saving gaming state, or the relationship may be the opposite. In this way, the gameplay can be improved and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the second special time-saving game state is in progress, it is possible to generate the second special time-saving game state when the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed during the game state, instead of causing the previously occurring second special time-saving game state and a new second special time-saving game state to overlap, a new second special time-saving game state is created. It is also possible to continue the second special time-saving game state that has occurred first without generating the special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving gaming state, and it also becomes easier for the player to understand the gameplay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the second special time-saving game state is in progress, it is possible to generate the second special time-saving game state when the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed during the game state, the second special time-saving game state that had occurred earlier and the new second special time-saving game state are not generated overlappingly, but are generated first. It is preferable to switch from the previously existing second special time-saving game state to a new second special time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to simplify the control of the time-saving gaming state, and it also becomes easier for the player to understand the gameplay, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, if the first special loss special symbol (for example, a special symbol in which the second time-saving number = 10 times is set) is displayed in a stopped state during the second special time-saving game state, a new second special time-saving game state is generated. The second special time-saving game state that occurred earlier is continued without causing the second special time-saving game state, and the second special losing special symbol (for example, a special symbol in which the second time-saving number = 20 times is set) during the second special time-saving game state. When is stopped and displayed, the previously occurring second special time-saving game state may be switched to a new second special time-saving game state, or the reverse relationship may be established. In this way, the gameplay can be improved and the interest of the game can be increased.

In addition, when the first special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a first special time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the first special time-saving gaming state has already occurred is set. may be set in the main RAM 110c. In this case, if there is no first special time-saving occurrence flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of fluctuations is cleared to 0, the first special time-saving game state is generated, and the first special time-saving occurrence occurs. If there is a completed flag, it is preferable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 to prevent the first special time-saving game state from occurring.

In addition, the number of time savings in the second special time saving game state (J2 = 10) and the number of time savings in the normal time saving game state (J2 = 7 times / 55 times / 95 times / 496 times) were different, for example. , it may be set to be the same as the specific number of time savings in the normal time saving game state (J2 = 7 times/55 times) so that it is less than the maximum number of time savings in the normal time saving game state (J2 = 496). However, the number of time reductions (for example, J2 = 5) may be set smaller than the minimum number of time reductions (J2 = 7 times) in the normal time reduction game state.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process (at the start of the stop display of special symbols), various time-saving game states can be ended, a first special time-saving game state can be generated, and a second special time-saving game state can be generated. However, in the special symbol stop process (at the end of the stop display of the special symbol), which will be described later, various time-saving game states can be ended, the first special time-saving game state can be generated, and the second special time-saving game state can be generated. You may also

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stopping process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S330-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (it is a small win special symbol or a loss special symbol), the process moves to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot according to the stop special symbol data (jackpot special symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot control data determination table (see FIG. 29(a)) for executing the jackpot game. A jackpot opening transition process is performed, such as selecting game control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of prizes, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-4, in order to transition to jackpot game process, special figure special electric processing data is changed. "3" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S330-6, and if it is not a small winning special symbol (it is a loss special symbol), the process moves to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a inputs the stop special symbol data (small winning special symbol) from the big winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game (see FIG. 29(b)) for executing the small winning game. A small winning opening transition process is performed, such as selecting the corresponding small winning game control data (maximum winning number, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-7, in order to transition to a small winning game, the special figure special electric processing data is "4" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets an opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, sets an opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, an opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing the opening performance of the jackpot game or the small win game is performed. When this process is finished, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

(control data table)
FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for a jackpot game for controlling the big winning opening during a jackpot game (special game), and FIG. 29(c) is a diagram showing a large winning opening control data determination table for a small winning game for controlling a large winning opening during a small winning game, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific area control data determination table for.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game includes the stop special symbol data of the special symbol, the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the types of big prize openings to be opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the big prize openings to be opened in each round game. The number of times, the opening time of the grand prize opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time during which the grand prize opening is closed after the end of the round game (in order to eject the game ball from the grand prize opening) required time) and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special pattern data is "01", the first jackpot game in which three round games are played is executed, and when the stop special pattern data is "02", three round games are played. At the same time, a second jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game, and if the stop special symbol data is "03", three round games are played. , a third jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special symbol data is "11", 10 round games are played, and a fourth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game. , when the stop special figure data is "12", 10 round games are played, and the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (same advantage as the fourth jackpot game) Execute the fifth jackpot game (degree of degree).

In addition, when the stop special symbol data is "13", the 1st V jackpot game in which the remaining two round games are played is executed via the 1st small win game which is the first round game, and the stop special symbol is If the diagram data is "14", the remaining 9 round games are played via the 2nd small winning game which is the 1st round game, and the 1st round game is more advantageous to the player than the 1V jackpot game. When the 2V jackpot game is executed and the stop special figure data is "15", the remaining two round games are played via the third small win game which is the first round game, and the 1st V jackpot is played. A 3rd V jackpot game is executed in which the state of the jackpot game may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game shown in FIG. , while the jackpot game of the maximum round (10 rounds) is not executed, when the jackpot game (4th to 5th jackpot game) based on winning in the second starting opening 47 is executed, the jackpot game of the maximum round (10 rounds) is executed. One point is that jackpot games are possible. By doing this, it is possible to make the gameplay different when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the large winning opening control data determination table for small winning games includes stop special symbol data (type of small winning games) of special symbols, and large winning openings that are opened in small winning games. The maximum number of openings, the maximum number of prizes that can be won in the big winning hole in small winning games, the opening time until the big winning hole is changed to the open state, the type of big winning hole to be opened, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening. The opening time of all the big winning openings, the interval time when the big winning opening is closed (the time required to eject the game ball from the big winning opening), and the small winning game from the last closing of the big winning opening. The ending time until the end is associated.

When the stop special pattern data is "13", the first small winning game is executed, and when the stopping special pattern data is "14", the second small winning game is executed, and when the stopping special pattern data is "14", the second small winning game is executed. 15'', the third small winning game is executed.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for small winning games shown in FIG. The time is set for the ball to be rolling on the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 (interval time 0.82 seconds for firing interval 0.67 seconds). By doing this, the opening time of the first big prize opening 50 can be shortened, and the opening time of the first big prize opening 50 can be shortened. It is possible to increase the number of times the winning opening is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game includes special symbol stop special symbol data (type of small winning game) and the specific area 53 to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of openings, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In the small winning game, regardless of the type of the small winning game, a specific area 53 is converted into an open state when a large winning opening in the small winning game is opened, and the specific area 53 is converted into a closed state when the large winning opening is closed.

As a feature of the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. One point is that the opening/closing timing of the specific area 53 is set so that the specific area 53 is passed through at . By doing so, the player can play the small winning game with peace of mind, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1), it is set to 50%. The specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

Also, depending on the type of small winning game, the specific area 53 may be opened or closed so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1) (for example, the 2 small winning games), and when opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that entered the first large prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4) (for example, a third small winning game). A game) may also be provided.

(Main control board jackpot game processing)
The jackpot game processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing jackpot game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the set opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, and an in-round flag indicating that a round game is in progress is set in the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-round flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the round game is in progress, the process moves to step S340-6, and if the round game is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the elapsed time from the start of the current round game has reached the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the jackpot game. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-7, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) are determined from the control data of the jackpot game. Specify the opening time of the second grand prize opening 56), and use the opening time of the grand prize opening and the drive data of the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) as the main Set it in RAM110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current opening of the big prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round game, and whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-9, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the interval time (closing time) of the big winning hole is specified. time) is set in the main RAM 110c, and at the same time, the drive data for the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied. Specifically, the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 50 or second grand prize opening 56) in this round game has reached the maximum winning number, or It is determined whether the opening time of the final opening has elapsed. If the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied, the process moves to step S340-11, and if the conditions for transition to the interval are not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closing time of the big prize opening) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning prize set in the main RAM 110c is Clear the drive data of the mouth solenoid. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state. Also, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an interval in-between flag indicating that the round is in progress is set. When the interval transition process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current interval is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the interval, the process moves to step S340-13, and if it is not during the interval, the process moves to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-14, and if the interval time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round game in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-17, and if the final round game has not ended, the process moves to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, a round game flag is set in place of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, instead of the during-interval flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an ending-in-progress flag indicating that an ending is in progress is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing an ending performance according to the current jackpot game is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether an ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S340-20, and if the ending is not in progress, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special figure special electric processing data is stored in order to move the processing to the jackpot game end processing. is set to "5", and the current jackpot game process ends.

(Small winning game processing on main control board)
The small winning game process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the small winning game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an opening/closing game in progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c, which indicates that the opening/closing game is in progress to open and close the big prize opening, and if the opening time has not elapsed, then , the current small winning game process ends.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is in progress with the opening/closing of the big prize opening. If the opening/closing game is in progress, the process moves to step S350-5, and if the opening/closing game is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening or interval of the small winning game has ended. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-6, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole ( Specify the opening time of the first grand prize opening 50 or the second grand prize opening 56), and determine the opening time of the grand prize opening and the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is set in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 are satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening timing of the specific area 53 (here, the opening timing of the big prize opening) specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 10(c) has come. If the opening condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-8, and if the opening condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area release processing in step S350-8. Specifically, drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the closing timing of the specific area 53 (here, the closing timing of the big prize opening) specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 10(c) has come. If the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-10, and if the closing condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area closing processing in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted into a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-12, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data of the small winning game shown in FIG. Clear the drive data of the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small winning game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the opening/closing game flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, the current small winning game Finish the process.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passing flag is saved in the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag has been saved, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game, and the process moves to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game is to be executed, and the specific area passing flag is saved. If not, the process moves to step S350-19 assuming that the ending is executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game.

The main CPU 110a clears the specific area passage flag saved in the main RAM 110c in step S350-16, and performs jackpot game transfer processing in step S350-17. Specifically, control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) and clearing the time saving flag and various number of time saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" in order to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing, and ends the current small winning game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the small winning game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the small winning game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small winning game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 in the ending production corresponding to the current small winning game (during the small winning game, more specifically, during the opening/closing game). Processing will be performed to execute a regret notification effect (such as a regret notification effect to notify that the vehicle did not pass).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the ending time set in step S350-19 is greater than or equal to "0". If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S350-22, and if the ending is not in progress, the current small winning game process is ended.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small hit game process is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, a special figure special electric signal is sent to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process. After setting the processing data to "0", the current small winning game processing is ended.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the small winning game (conversion game) ends (10 openings of the first big prize opening or winning of 10 game balls). The jackpot game is not executed until it is done. Therefore, the player is not put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed without performing the ending of the small winning game. Therefore, the period from the small win game to the big win game will not be extended, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the jackpot game may be executed after the small win game ends.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special symbol data saved in the main RAM 110c in step S360-1, and determines whether the stop special symbol data is a jackpot special symbol in step S360-2. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S360-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (it is a small win special symbol), the process moves to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot that is saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, sets the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot. The first gaming state setting table (see FIG. 33(a)) for the game is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information when passing through the specific area saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, determines the gaming state after the jackpot game based on the gaming state information when passing through the specific area. The second gaming state setting table (see FIG. 33(b)) for setting is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a collates the acquired gaming state information etc. with the selected gaming state setting table and sets the gaming state flag, the number of time reductions (J1 to J3), and the small number of times as the gaming state after the jackpot game. The remaining number of hits (Z) is determined and set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state flag is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

In this way, at the end of the jackpot game executed when the game ball passed the specific area 53 during the small win game, based on the game state when the game ball passed the specific area during the small win game, It is possible to perform predetermined processing (specifically, processing of determining gaming conditions after a jackpot game (gaming status, number of time reductions, remaining number of small winnings), and setting the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 110c). It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (setting the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur in the actual game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, predetermined processing (specifically, the gaming conditions after the jackpot game (game status, time saving number, small It is possible to perform processing such as determining the remaining number of wins (remaining number of wins) and setting the determined gaming conditions in the main RAM 110c. Therefore, the game performance can be varied depending on whether it is a jackpot game via a small win game or a jackpot game without passing through a small win game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, the predetermined process is not performed based on the gaming state when it is determined to be a jackpot, but based on the gaming state when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. Predetermined processing may also be performed.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 33(a) is a diagram showing a first gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a second gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the first gaming state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving game state is in effect), a first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special time-saving game state that ends the time-saving game state. A second time saving number (J2), which is the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time saving gaming state. The remaining number of small winnings (Z), which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state, is associated with the remaining number of small winnings (Z).

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the second game state setting table includes the stop special symbol data of the small hit special symbol and the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53, which indicates the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53. information, a gaming state flag to be set (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving gaming state), a first time saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and a time saving flag. The second time-saving number (J2) is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the second number of variable displays is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time-saving gaming state. 3 The number of time-saving games (J3) is associated with the remaining number of small winnings (Z), which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the second time saving number (J2) is set when the game is executed in the time saving game state, rather than the second time saving number (J2) which is set when the game is performed in the normal gaming state. One point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the second time saving number (J2) is greater. By doing this, the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game can be varied, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is the second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the normal gaming state, and the second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the time saving gaming state. There is a jackpot game (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) in which the 2nd time saving number (J2) is the same, and the 2nd time saving number (J2) of that jackpot game is the same as other jackpot games (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game). One point is that the number of time reductions (J2) is greater than the second time saving number (J2) of the first jackpot game and the third jackpot game. By doing this, the value of the jackpot game can be made different based on the number of time savings rather than the difference depending on the prize ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game. becomes.

The third feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set when the game is executed in the time-saving gaming state, rather than the remaining number of small wins (Z) that is set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state. One point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is larger. By doing so, it is possible to vary the remaining number of small wins (Z) set depending on the type of jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is the remaining number of small wins (Z) that is set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state, and the small winning number (Z) that is set when the game is executed in the time-saving gaming state. There are jackpot games (4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) in which the remaining number of hits (Z) are the same, and in the normal gaming state, the remaining number of small wins (Z) of that jackpot game is the same as that of other jackpot games (the 5th jackpot game). An example of this is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) for the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the third jackpot game) is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z). By doing this, the value of the jackpot game can be made different depending on the remaining number of small wins, rather than the difference depending on the prize ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and the game performance is improved and the interest of the game is increased. becomes possible.

The fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that for a jackpot game executed via a small win game, there is a second time saving number (J2) set when the jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state. More importantly, there are jackpot games (1st V jackpot game, 3rd V jackpot game) in which the second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the time saving game state is greater. By doing this, it is possible to vary the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game via the small win game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game. becomes.

The sixth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the jackpot game executed via the small win game is smaller than the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in the normal gaming state. Another point is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when the game is executed in the time-saving gaming state is larger. By doing so, the value of the jackpot game via the small win game can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that when the first jackpot game (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game, second V jackpot game) is executed, Regardless of the game state (normal game state or time-saving game state) before the execution of the jackpot game, the number of variable displays of special symbols that end the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving number, second time-saving number) , 3rd time saving number) does not change and the second jackpot game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game, 1st V jackpot game, 3rd V jackpot game) is executed, before the jackpot game is executed. The point is that the number of variable displays of the special symbol that ends the normal time saving game state (second time saving number) changes depending on the game state. By doing this, the progress state of the game can be reflected in the profit that the player can obtain, so it is possible to attract the player's interest in the game state before the jackpot game is executed, and the interest of the game can be increased. It becomes possible to improve the

The eighth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 33 is that the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display has been executed in the normal time saving game state has reached a predetermined number (J1 to J3 = 0), or the small hit Based on the fact that the number of times it is determined that the game is to be executed reaches a predetermined number (the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0"), it is possible to end the normal time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to give the player an exciting feeling that the normal time saving game state will end even if the time saving number (J1 to J3) does not reach "0", and also giving the player a small win that is directly connected to the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the act of selecting a type of game (type of jackpot game) and executing a jackpot game, which harms a fair game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, three types are set as the number of variable displays of the special symbol to end the time saving game state: a first time saving number (J1), a second time saving number (J2), and a third time saving number (J3). There may be two types: a first time reduction number (J1) and a second time reduction number (J2), a first time reduction number (J1) and a third time reduction number (J3), or a second time reduction number. (J2) and the third number of time reductions (J3), or may be one type, the third number of time reductions (J3).

In addition, when a jackpot game (1st to 5th jackpot game) that does not go through a small win game is executed, the game state (normal game state or time-saving game state) before the jackpot game is executed. Regardless, the number of variable displays of the special symbol that ends the normal time saving game state (first time saving number, second time saving number, third time saving number) does not change, and the jackpot game via the small winning game (1st V~ When a 3rd V jackpot game) is executed, the number of variable displays of the special symbol that ends the normal time-saving game state (second time-saving number) may be changed depending on the game state before the jackpot game is executed. .

In addition, instead of generating the normal time-saving gaming state after all jackpot games are finished, for example, after the first jackpot game or the 1V jackpot game, the normal time-saving gaming state is not generated and the normal gaming state is entered. , After the end of other jackpot games, a normal time saving game state may be generated.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a gaming state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, and FIG. 34(a) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a normal gaming state. , FIG. 34(b) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final fluctuation), and FIG. 34(c) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final fluctuation). It is a timing chart when it is executed.

Regarding the gaming state that is referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (playing state, number of time savings, number of remaining small winnings) at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, the timing when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment (when the jackpot is won) ).

As shown in FIG. 34(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the timing when the jackpot is won. The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, The gaming condition at the time when the jackpot is won is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small winnings) are set. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, the jackpot The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status at the time of winning. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a gaming state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small winning game, and FIG. 35(a) is a timing chart when a small winning fluctuation display is executed in a normal gaming state. Yes, and FIG. 35(b) is a timing chart when a small winning variation display is executed in which the time-saving end condition is not satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 34(c) is a timing chart when the time-saving ending condition is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state. It is a timing chart when a small winning fluctuation display is executed.

Regarding the game state that is referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number, remaining number of small winnings) at the end of the jackpot game via the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game. The timing is when the game is played (the time of transition to the jackpot game).

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the small winning fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game at T4 at the end of the jackpot game at T6. The gaming condition at the time of the game is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal gaming state has been in place since the start of the small win fluctuation display, the timing of T4 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), when a small winning variation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition is executed in the time saving game state, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small winning game. The gaming condition (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the gaming condition when the character passes through the specific area 53. In this case, when the small win fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, the various time saving numbers and the remaining number of small winnings are not "0" and the time saving gaming state is maintained, so the timing of T4 is called the time saving gaming state. It turns out. Incidentally, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game starts and shifts to the normal gaming state, but when passing the specific area 53, it is called a time-saving gaming state before shifting to the normal gaming state. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 35(c), when the small winning variation display that satisfies the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small winning game. The gaming condition (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the gaming condition when the character passes through the specific area 53. In this case, when the small winning fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, one of the time saving times becomes "0" and the time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, so the timing of T4 is called the normal gaming state. It turns out.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, when the jackpot game is completed by executing the jackpot fluctuation display and when the jackpot game is executed by performing the small win fluctuation display, The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the gaming state referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (gaming state, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(General control board control process)
Referring to FIG. 36, the general electric power control process of the main control board 110 will be explained. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose electric power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electricity processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded general electricity processing data, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute this to end the current regular electricity control process.

Specifically, if the general pattern/universal electric processing data = 0, the process for executing the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol based on the reserved memory (common pattern judgment information) and the general pattern/universal electric processing data are set to "1". A normal symbol variation process (step S410) is executed to perform a process of changing to a normal symbol. The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later.

If the general figure general electric power processing data = 1, the processing for executing the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner, the processing for changing the general electric figure general electric power processing data to "0", etc. are performed. The auxiliary game process (step S420) is executed.

(Normal pattern variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. If the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S410-12, and if the normal symbols are not in the variable display mode, the process moves to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of normal symbols reserved (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbols held (G) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbols held (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the normal symbol reservation number (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, performs a shift process of the data stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and The ordinary figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the ordinary symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the ordinary symbol determination information reservation storage region. In addition, the ordinary figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the ordinary figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th memory part, which is the ordinary figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th memory part. The normal pattern determination information used in the previous game is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, using the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 38(a)), it is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the gaming state and the random number value for hit determination stored in the normal symbol execution storage area. decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 38(b)), the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display is determined based on the gaming state, the winning determination result, and the random value for determining the regular symbol. Determine the stop pattern data of the symbol. The details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the stop symbol data.

The main CPU 110a performs normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S410-8. Specifically, the normal symbol is determined based on the hit determination result and the random value of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern using the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 38(c) to (e)) according to the gaming state. Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for displaying fluctuations. In addition, the details of the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the general pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the common figure variation pattern.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The symbol fluctuation display is started, and the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 62 by being output in the output control process of step S800. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped in step S410-13, and in step S410-14. , a normal symbol confirmation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the production control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (winning winning). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended, and if it is a winning normal symbol, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 38(f)) in step S410-16. Obtain auxiliary game control data to play. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game has started on the production control board 130.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in 410-16 of the auxiliary game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data obtained in 410-16. The data is set to "1" and the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

(Hit judgment table for normal symbols)
FIG. 38(a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referred to when determining a hit based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols corresponds to the gaming state when performing hit determination, the random number value for hit determination, and the determination result of hit determination (win, loss). The approximate probability of winning is listed in the far right column for reference.

A "win" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will be executed, and a "loss" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will not be executed. In addition, for the hit determination, only a loss is set, and a special loss (time saving) is not set.

The first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. The point is that the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a hit is the same regardless of whether the game is in the state or the second special time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the probability (proportion) of being determined to be a hit may be higher in the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) (generating a regular game probability change), In this case, the probability (proportion) of winning in the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state may be the same, or the probability of winning in the special time-saving gaming state is higher than in the normal time-saving gaming state. The probability (ratio) of being determined may be higher, or the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a win may be higher in the normal time-saving gaming state than in the special time-saving gaming state.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG. 38(b) is a normal symbol determination table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a normal symbol based on the ordinary symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the ordinary symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), the normal symbol determination table includes the gaming state at the time of determination, the determination result of the hit determination (win, loss), the random number value for determining the winning symbol, and the normal symbol determination table. The determination result, the stopped ordinary symbol data indicating the determination result, and the ordinary symbol designation command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a loss normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a normal symbol when an auxiliary game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened once or twice depending on the game state.
The normal symbol "2" is a normal symbol when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened twice is executed regardless of the game state.

(Public figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 38(c) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 38(d) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the normal time-saving gaming state. FIG. 38(e) is a normal time saving normal figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the normal time saving game state. This is a special time-saving regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the regular symbol fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 38(c) to 38(e), the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the judgment result of the hit determination, the random value of the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the judgment result of the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination. The variation time is associated with a common figure variation pattern designation command that indicates the result of this determination.

The first feature of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 38(c) to 38(e) is that in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), a relatively long fluctuation time is determined; In various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), relatively short fluctuation times are determined, that is, the fluctuations are shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. One point is that the time is easy to determine. By doing so, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second start opening 47 in the various time-saving game states than in the non-time-saving state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 38(c) to 38(e) is the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state (first special time-saving gaming state, second special time-saving gaming state). ), it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol using a different ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination table. By doing so, it is possible to provide characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 38(c) to 38(e) is the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state (first special time-saving gaming state, second special time-saving gaming state). ), it is possible to display variations in ordinary symbols using different ordinary symbol fluctuation patterns. By doing so, it is possible to provide characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 38(c) to 38(e) is that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern has a shorter fluctuation time in the special time-saving gaming state than in the normal time-saving gaming state. There are some points that are easy to be made. By doing so, it is possible to provide characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 38(c) to 38(e) is that the same regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is used in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. One point is that it is possible to determine the general pattern fluctuation pattern using the method. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the normal pattern fluctuation patterns, and to make the control during the time-saving gaming state more efficient, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 38(c) to 38(e) is that the same normal pattern fluctuation pattern is used in the first special time-saving gaming state and the second special time-saving gaming state. One of the points that can be cited is that it is possible to perform a variable display of normal symbols. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the normal pattern fluctuation patterns, and to make the control during the time-saving gaming state more efficient, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the same regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 38(d) Alternatively, the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38(e) may be used. In this way, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the normal pattern fluctuation patterns, and to make the control during the time-saving gaming state more efficient, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, different ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination tables are used in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state (for example, in the first special time-saving game state, the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 38(e), the second special In the time-saving game state, it is also possible to use a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table in which the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined regardless of whether or not there is a win. In this way, it is possible to provide characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the same regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. 38(d)) is used in the normal time saving gaming state and one of the first special time saving gaming state and the second special time saving gaming state. In this way, only the other of the first special time-saving gaming state and the second special time-saving gaming state may be used with a different common pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, the common pattern fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 38(e)).

In addition, the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) uses a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is more likely to be shortened than the normal time-saving game state. However, in the normal time-saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is more likely to be shortened than in the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state).The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table is used. You can.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 38(f) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of normal winning symbol.

As shown in FIG. 38(f), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop general pattern data, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. , the first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated.

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that the auxiliary game is executed in various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special The opening time of the second starting port 47 is longer when the auxiliary game is executed in the time saving game state). By doing so, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second start opening 47 in various time-saving game states than in non-time-saving game states, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that the second starting port 47 is opened in different opening modes (opening time, number of openings) in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state. One point is that it is possible. By doing so, it is possible to provide characteristics such as different performance depending on the type of time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that the second starting port 47 is set in an opening mode (opening time, number of openings) that is more advantageous in the special time-saving game state than in the normal time-saving game state. One of the points is that it is easy to open up. By doing so, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 38(f) is that the second starting port 47 is opened in the same opening manner (opening time, number of openings) in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. One point is that it is possible to open up the By doing so, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the opening mode of the second starting port 47, and also to make control during the time-saving gaming state more efficient, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the second starting port 47 is opened in the same opening mode (opening time, number of openings) in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). Good too. In this case, the opening mode may be in accordance with the normal time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38(f), or may be in the opening mode in accordance with the special time-saving gaming state. In this way, the storage capacity related to the opening mode of the second starting port 47 can be reduced, and control during the time-saving gaming state can be made more efficient, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Further, the second starting port 47 may be opened in different opening modes (opening time, number of openings) in the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state. In this case, in the first special time-saving game state, the second starting port 47 is opened in the opening mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38(f), and in the second special time-saving game state, It is preferable to open the second starting port 47 in an opening mode (the number of openings and/or the opening time is different) that is more advantageous or disadvantageous to the player than the opening mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state shown. In this way, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second start is performed in the same opening mode in the normal time-saving game state and one of the first special time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state (for example, the opening state according to the normal time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38(f)). The opening 47 is opened, and the second starting opening 47 is opened in a different opening mode between the first special time saving gaming state and the second special working time saving gaming state (for example, the opening mode corresponding to the special working time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 38(f)). It may be made to open.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting changes)
With reference to FIG. 39, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting changes will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and a setting change operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned on, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting change mode. This is a pre-start state before game progress control is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

At timing T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are completed, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is The setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. Begins. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are started. When all the lights are lit, lighting confirmation begins. Note that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 ends.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when a setting confirmation operation is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on (the setting key switch 112a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting confirmation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. The state is before the start. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed at the timing T2, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are finished, the initial operations of various drive sources are started, and 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is The setting value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

Note that the specific example from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 is the same as the specific example from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 in the specific example when the various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change shown in FIG. Therefore, the explanation here will be omitted.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member) that affect the result of the game 52, various drive sources for operating the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is initially operated, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500 is installed). (including replacement of the game machine), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66 , the right-hand drive display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, so it is possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized, an initial operation notification is provided to encourage the operation confirmation of the various drive sources. It is possible to inform the operator (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to check the operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to have the operator check the operation appropriately.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before the start of game progress control, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends. Since the initial operation is performed, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (confirming the settings), and it becomes possible to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is started after an operation standby time has elapsed. It is possible to provide enough time from the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) until the operation confirmation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to appropriately perform the operation confirmation.

In addition, the same initial operation notification is issued regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so the big prize can be won. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it becomes possible to properly check the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed, and in the playable state where the progress control of the game is performed, the game Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 is performed that does not affect the result of the operation, it is possible to confirm two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening are opened. Since the system does not output the open signal even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and also to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is regulated) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the game progress control starts. Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control has started (display of performance information is allowed), the game progress control has started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the player is present, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed. can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure convenience on the game parlor side.

In addition, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display the setting values or performance information of the gaming machine, so that employees at the game parlor cannot confirm the initial operation of the various drive sources. This makes it possible to concentrate one's consciousness and accurately judge failures in various drive sources.

Note that after the game progress control has started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting, but after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, In this case, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 41, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are explained. The operations at the operation timing (initial operation, jackpot game operation, small win game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) are compared.

The number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

The driving time for one operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary gaming operation during the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is shorter during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

The number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven is greater during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

The total driving time of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is shorter during the initial operation than during the jackpot game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and the time required for one time driving. , may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, the time required for one time driving. , the value may be smaller than the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven at the time of initial operation, the time of one time of driving, and the total time of driving is replaced with the number of times of driving, the time of one time of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. , may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven at the time of initial operation, the time of one time of driving, and the total time of driving is replaced with the number of times of driving, the time of one time of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. , may be set to a value larger than the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven at the time of initial operation, the time of one time of driving, and the total time of driving is replaced with the number of times of driving, the time of one time of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. , the value may be smaller than the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is the number of times the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the small winning game operation. , one driving time, and the total driving time may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first big winning opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation and the total driving time is set to be greater than the number of driving times and the total driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. It can be set to a large value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation and the total driving time is set to be smaller than the one driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. It can be a value. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small winning game operation, the driving time per time. , may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the driving time and total driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation is set to be longer than the driving time and total driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small winning game operation. It can be set to a large value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small winning game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is replaced with the driving time per time, the total driving time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). It may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the drive time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is set to be larger than the driving time once and the total driving time during the jackpot game operation. May be used as a value. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(First modification)
The first modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. In the first modification, the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, the drive source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process, and the settings This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that RWM clearing is performed during execution of the change process, so only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described using FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that correspond to the initial setting process of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and the explanation thereof is omitted, and only the parts around the different parts will be explained.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in jackpot determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, and the above-mentioned The drive source initial operation process is performed, and the process moves to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing areas other than the set value area of the main RAM 110c) and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation processing are performed. , the process moves to step S26. Note that details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, the processing for displaying the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the main RAM 110c on the information display 113 and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation processing are performed, and the process proceeds to step S30. move.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described using FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the production control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for notifying RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the image display device to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or notifying the audio output device 9 of "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This means outputting audio over a predetermined period of time.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow Processing is performed to initially operate the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and RWM clear is performed and the process moves to step S24-4; if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24-2. Transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the main RAM 110c other than the set value area. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the main RAM 110c before RWM clearing is not inherited.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to end the RWM clear preparation notification described above.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode is ended by the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear processing.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation will be described using FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm solenoid operation Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice "Please do so" will begin.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Transition to possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are started. When all the lights are lit, lighting confirmation begins. Note that the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member) that affect the result of the game 52, various drive sources for operating the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is initially operated, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500 is installed). (including replacement of the game machine), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66 , the right-hand drive display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, so it is possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, a setting change notification (setting The operation of the gaming machine 1 is checked to confirm that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources. It is possible to inform the workers (factory workers, game store clerks) and have them appropriately check the operation.

In addition, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, so the start time is before the game progress control starts. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the previous state, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shorten the development period, etc.) of the gaming machine 1.

Additionally, when the pre-start state ends due to a setting value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the operation of various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of each drive source has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of the various drive sources is not carried out in a game ready state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusion with the operation of the various drive sources in accordance with the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed, and in the playable state where the progress control of the game is performed, the game Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 is performed that does not affect the result of the operation, it is possible to confirm two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so the big prize can be won. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it becomes possible to properly check the operation. .

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening are opened. Since the system does not output the open signal even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and also to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is regulated) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the game progress control starts. Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control has started (display of performance information is allowed), the game progress control has started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the player is present, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed. can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure convenience on the game parlor side.

In addition, when setting change notification in setting change mode, a setting change screen was displayed that displayed the text "Settings changing", but in addition to the text "Settings changing", various drive sources A setting change screen may be displayed that displays the words "Driving source initial operation in progress" or "Please check solenoid operation" to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 45, various types of drive sources (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are explained. The operations at the operation timing (initial operation, jackpot game operation, small win game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) are compared.

The driving time for one operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary gaming operation during the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b once during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time once during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. . In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, set the driving time of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b once during the initial operation to the same value as the total driving time or the driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. It may be set to approximately the same (similar) value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time for one time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the driving time for one driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. . In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

Further, the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the small winning game operation. . In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the small winning game operation. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Moreover, even if the driving time for one time of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is set to the same value or almost the same (similar) value as the driving time for one time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). good. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Moreover, the driving time of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time at one time at the time of the jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Timing chart when normal time saving gaming state occurs)
FIG. 46 is a timing chart when the normal time saving gaming state occurs.

First, at timing T1, a variable display of a special symbol that becomes a jackpot is started. At this time, since it is in the normal gaming state, all information such as the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play to calculate the normal base value, and the total number of outs to set the playing section are not collected. It is running.

Next, at timing T2, a fluctuating display of the winning normal symbols is started. In this fluctuating display, a fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state.

After that, at timing T3, the stop display of the special symbol starts, and at timing T4, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for jackpot) of the special symbol has elapsed, the jackpot game (opening) starts, and the right At the same time as the hit display 67 lights up, output of a special game signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is started. Additionally, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value will stop, and the aggregation (count) of the total number of outs for setting the gaming section will continue (normal base value calculation and display of normal base value will also continue).

Then, at the timing T5, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Further, at timing T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game (low probability non-time saving game state), the fluctuating display is performed according to a relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the jackpot game. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T10, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game, it is performed in a relatively long regular pattern fluctuating pattern for a non-time saving state. Then, at timing T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the normal time saving game state is started and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is during the jackpot game (low probability). Since it was started during the non-time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at timing T14, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short common pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state. Then, at timing T16, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of winning normal symbols is started.

Here, we have shown an example in which the normal time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. From the fluctuating display of symbols, a fluctuating display based on a relatively short common symbol fluctuating pattern for the time-saving state is performed.

In this way, when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs, the normal time-saving gaming state will occur after a predetermined period of time has passed (after the end of the jackpot game) after the stop display of the special symbol that becomes a jackpot ends. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage during the jackpot game, and it is possible to ensure a balance of profits between the game parlor side and the player side.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the losing special symbol has elapsed and the jackpot game in the low-probability time-saving game state starts). The right-handed player indicator 67 is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state occurs, from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving game state occurs (when the stop time of the losing special symbol has elapsed and the jackpot game in the low-probability time-saving game state starts). , the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value are not possible. Since this is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a normal time-saving gaming state occurs, an advantageous state signal is output from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs (at the start of a jackpot game that is a low-probability time-saving gaming state). . Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the fluctuating display of the normal symbols, regardless of whether the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively short regular symbol for the time-saving state will start from the next fluctuating display of the normal symbol. Fluctuations are displayed based on fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving gaming state, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variable display based on a relatively short normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state will be performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 is opened during the long opening time for the time saving state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the variable display control of normal symbols or the control of auxiliary games midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

(Timing chart when the normal time saving gaming state ends)
FIG. 47 is a timing chart when the normal time saving gaming state ends.

First, at timing T1, a variable display of special symbols that will be the final round in the normal time-saving gaming state, that is, a variable display of special symbols that will result in a loss, is started. At this time, since the game is in the normal time-saving game state, the right-handed display 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since the normal time saving gaming state is in effect, the information aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value has been stopped (interrupted), while setting the gaming section. Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is being performed.

Next, at timing T2, a fluctuating display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short common pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing T3, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T4, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is during the normal time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the time saving state, it is performed using a relatively short regular figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is during the normal time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state.

Next, at timing T8, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short common pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T9, when the stop display of the special symbol starts, the normal time saving game state ends and the normal game state starts, the right hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous state signal stops. be done. Also, since the normal gaming state has been entered, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is resumed. Further, the stop display of the normal symbols is started.

After that, at timing T10, the stop time of the normal symbols has passed and the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols was started during the normal time-saving game state, the second The starting port 47 will be opened.

Then, at timing T11, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display is started during the normal gaming state, the fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time M (8.0 seconds at the end of time saving) has elapsed, the variable display of the next special symbol that will be a loss is started. Then, at the timing of T13, the stop display of the normal symbols is disclosed, and at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens with a long opening time for the non-time saving state. Then, at timing T15, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started.

Here, we have shown an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends while the normal symbols are stopped being displayed, but even if the normal time-saving gaming state ends while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during an auxiliary game, the next normal From the fluctuating display of symbols, a fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular symbol fluctuating pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state.

In addition, in the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed and the normal time-saving game state ends, so the right-handed display 67 goes out and the advantageous state is reached. At the same time as the output of the signal is stopped, aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

In this way, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, ends. There is. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor side and the player side, provide the player with an unprecedented gaming experience of a normal time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state is ended and the right-handed display 67 is turned off. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the normal period for calculating the normal base value ends. The aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts and the number of outs during normal play has been resumed. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state ends during the fluctuating display of the normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively long game state for the non-time-saving state will be started from the next fluctuating display of the normal symbols. Fluctuations are displayed using diagram fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variable display based on a relatively long normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state will be performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the variable display control of normal symbols or the control of auxiliary games midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

(Timing chart from before the start to after the end of the first special time-saving game state)
FIG. 48 is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the first special time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times (500 times).

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of a special symbol that becomes a loss for the specified number of times (500 times) starts from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0). Ru. Further, at the timing of T2, a variable display of normal symbols that become a hit is started. In this fluctuating display, a fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular pattern fluctuating pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state.

After that, at timing T3, when the stop display of the special symbols starts, the first special time-saving game state starts regardless of whether or not the player is waiting for a customer, the right-handed display 67 lights up, and the normal Output of an advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state is started. In addition, since the first special time-saving gaming state has entered, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), and the total outs for setting the gaming section are stopped (interrupted). The aggregation (counting) of the numbers continues (the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value also continue).

Then, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time N (normally 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol that will result in a loss is started.

Also, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at timing T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the first special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing T8, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is in the first special time-saving game state. Since the start is started during the middle of the day, the second starting port 47 opens with a long opening time for the time saving state. In addition, stop display of the losing special symbol is started.

Furthermore, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time N (0.5 seconds for a loss) has elapsed, the variable display of the next special symbol that will be a loss starts. Further, at timing T11, the auxiliary game ends and a variable display of normal symbols that become a win is disclosed. Since this fluctuating display was started during the first special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T12, the variable display of the special symbols that will be the final round in the first special time-saving game state, that is, the variable display of the special symbols that will result in a loss, is started. In addition, when the stop time of the normal symbols has passed, the auxiliary game is disclosed, but since the variable display of the normal symbols was started during the first special time-saving game state, the second starting port 47 is opened during the long opening time for the time-saving state. will be opened.

Next, at timing T13, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the first special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal figure fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is in the first special time-saving game state. Since the start is started during the middle of the day, the second starting port 47 opens with a long opening time for the time saving state.

Also, at timing T16, when the stop display of the losing special symbol (M for time saving final variation) is started, the first special time saving game state is ended and the normal game state is started, and the right hit indicator 67 is When the light is turned off, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Also, since the normal gaming state has been entered, the counting of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

Furthermore, at timing T17, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state), it is performed with a relatively long regular symbol fluctuation pattern for the non-time-saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T18, when the stop time M (8.0 seconds for time saving final variation) of the losing special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol that will be a loser will start, and at the timing of T19, the changing display of the losing special symbol will start. Stop display starts.

Then, at timing T20, variable display of special symbols that result in a loss is started. Further, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of normal symbols that become a win is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state), it is performed with a relatively long regular symbol fluctuation pattern for the non-time-saving state.

Then, at timing T21, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols was started during the normal game state, the second opening time for the non-time saving state is used. The starting port 47 will be opened.

Here, we have shown an example in which the first special time-saving game state is started while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. Also, from the next fluctuating display of the regular symbol, a fluctuating display based on a relatively short regular symbol fluctuation pattern for the time saving state will be performed.

In addition, although an example has been shown in which the first special time-saving game state ends while the auxiliary game is being executed, the first special time-saving game state ends while the normal symbols are being displayed fluctuating or while the normal symbols are being stopped. Also, from the fluctuating display of the normal symbol to be executed next, a fluctuating display based on a relatively long regular symbol fluctuating pattern for the non-time saving state will be performed.

In addition, although we have shown an example in which the fluctuating display of the special symbol that is the final round in the first special time-saving game state is a loss, even if it is a small hit, the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that will be executed next Fluctuation display will be performed using a relatively long regular pattern fluctuation pattern for the non-time-saving state.

In this way, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol stops. When displayed, the first special time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (starts) regardless of whether the player is in the waiting state or not. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented gaming experience in which a time-saving state occurs even when the player loses, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (When the stop time starts), the first special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the right-hand game indicator 67 lights up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages related to the occurrence of the first special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (The stop time starts), the first special time-saving gaming state occurs (starts) and the aggregation of the number of payouts and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value is stopped, that is, the special time-saving gaming state The calculation of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play is continued until immediately before a gaming state occurs. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even if the aggregation of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value will continue, so the display It becomes possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the normal base value.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (When the stop time starts), a first special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state occurs during the fluctuating display of normal symbols, regardless of whether the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively short Fluctuations are displayed according to the regular pattern fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the next auxiliary symbol will be displayed in a relatively short regular symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state, and the next auxiliary symbol will be displayed in a relatively short fluctuating pattern. The second starting port 47 is opened during the long opening time for the time-saving state from the game. Therefore, due to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols or the control of auxiliary games midway through, and it is possible to reduce the processing burden. .

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol in the final round (750th time) in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state advantageous to the player ends. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to secure the balance of profits between the game parlor side and the player side, provide the player with an unprecedented game feature of the first special time-saving game state, and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuating display of the special symbol in the final round (750th time) in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state ends and the right hit display is displayed. The lamp 67 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages due to the end of the first special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuating display of the special symbol in the final round (750th time) in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state ends and the normal base value In other words, the calculation of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of out during normal play restarts from the end of the first special time-saving gaming state. There is. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol in the final round (750th time) in the first special time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state ends and an advantageous state signal is signaled. output is now stopped. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state ends during the fluctuating display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, from the next fluctuating display of normal symbols, the comparative Fluctuations are displayed using long regular pattern fluctuations. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway through the completion of the first special time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if the first special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the next auxiliary symbol will be displayed in a relatively long regular symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state, and the next auxiliary symbol will be displayed in a relatively long regular symbol fluctuation pattern. The second starting port 47 opens after a short opening time for the non-time-saving state after playing the game. Therefore, due to the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols or the control of auxiliary games midway through, and it is possible to reduce the processing burden. .

In addition, the loss special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), The stop display may be made for a longer time than the normal stop time (0.5 seconds). In this way, it is possible to make the player aware that the first special time-saving gaming state will occur due to the length of the stop time, and also to make the player aware that the first special time-saving gaming state will occur. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the loss special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) is stopped and displayed for a longer time than the normal stop time, the first special symbol will be displayed during the stop time. It is also possible to perform a performance that suggests that a time-saving gaming state will occur. In this way, the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state can be immediately notified to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the case where the first special time-saving game state starts and ends is explained here, the case where the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display and the second special time-saving game state starts and ends is also explained. Since the start and end of the first special time-saving game state are basically the same except for the difference in the number of time-saving games, the first special time-saving game state can be read as the second special time-saving game state.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of main processing in the production control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are enabled in step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs sub random number update processing in step E7. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
Using FIG. 50, the timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 130m will be explained. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the production control section 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E200. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, a process is performed to analyze the command (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Note that details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in a customer waiting state where special symbols are not displayed or special games (big hit games, small win games) are being executed. Based on the fact that the waiting time has elapsed, processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to stimulate the player's desire to play.

The sub CPU 130a performs operation-based performance execution processing in step E500. Specifically, a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable performance is executed, and the expectation level that a jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during this valid period is increased. Processing is performed to execute an operation-based jackpot preview performance that suggests (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed).

The "operation-based jackpot preview performance" includes a dialogue preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot game to be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and the result of the roulette game executed on the image display device. A roulette preview effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed based on the type of cut-in image displayed on an image display device and a display mode; There are four types of winning/losing performances that indicate whether or not a special game will be executed: a successful performance with a 100% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, or a failure performance with a 0% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a lamp lighting effect execution process in step E600. Specifically, by changing the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 75 in accordance with changes in the pending icon displayed on the image display device or the display mode of the icon, the lamp emits light that indicates the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed. Perform processing to execute the performance.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E700. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C that are set in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), countdown mode, super wild dance mode that is set in the normal time-saving game state, normal time-saving game state and the first special There are a wild dance mode, an infinite mode, which are set in the time-saving game state, and a rush battle mode, which is set in the normal time-saving game state and the second special time-saving game state.

"Production modes A to C" are production modes that can be set when the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 20(a) is selected.
"Countdown mode" is an effect mode that can be set when the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 20(b) is selected.
In addition, in the performance modes A to C and the countdown mode, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a display mode including characters and numbers.

"Rush battle mode" is an effect mode that can be set when special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for normal time saving and second special time saving shown in FIG. 21 is selected.
"Ranbu mode" is used when the normal time-saving special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 or 4 shown in FIG. 22 is selected, or the special time-saving special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25(c). This is a production mode that can be set when 3 is selected.

"Super wild dance mode" is an effect mode that can be set when the normal time saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 5 or 6 shown in FIG. 23 is selected.
"Infinite mode" is used when the normal time-saving special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 7 or 8 shown in FIG. 24 is selected, or when the first special time-saving special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. It is a production mode that can be set when 2 or 2 is selected.
In addition, in the rush battle mode, wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, and infinite mode, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a display mode of only numbers without characters.

The sub CPU 130a performs special time-saving effect processing in step E750. Specifically, a special time-saving effect to suggest information regarding the occurrence of a special time-saving gaming state (an RWM clear negative effect indicating that RWM clear has not been performed (is deferred), which will be described later), the first special Processing such as determining whether or not to execute an activation counter display indicating the number of fluctuations until transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed. Note that details of the special time-saving effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the overall control section 141 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Mode flow showing the transition of game modes)
FIG. 51(a) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 51(b) is a mode flow when the jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. (Normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed. This is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in the state (first special time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 51(a), in the normal gaming state, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, three rounds are played. A first jackpot game consisting of a game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 1.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, a second jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then a second jackpot game is executed. The number of times shortened by 2 hours (J2) is set to 95 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, a third jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then a The game shifts to a rush battle mode in which the number of 2-hour reductions (J2) is set to 7 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.

Also, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then a The number of 2-hour reductions (J2) is set to 496, and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.
Also, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then a The number of 2-hour reductions (J2) is set to 496, and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.

Furthermore, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the 1st V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, a 2V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, a 3rd V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.

As shown in Figure 51(b), in the rush battle mode or wild dance mode where the remaining number of small hits is one, the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result), and the jackpot is hit. When the special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small wins (remains 1 round), and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2 times.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 3 times. The first jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 3 times. The first jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.

In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 10 times. A fourth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 10 times. A fifth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.

Furthermore, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 0 and the game returns to the normal gaming state. A first V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to one.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 0 and the game enters the normal gaming state. A 2nd V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 0 and the game returns to the normal gaming state. A 3rd V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to one.

As shown in FIG. 51(c), in Super Ranbu mode or Infinite mode where the remaining number of small hits is 2, the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result), and the jackpot is reached. When the special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small wins (remaining 2 rounds), and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2 times.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be repeated 3 times. A second jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be repeated 3 times. A third jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.

In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be repeated 10 times. A fourth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be repeated 10 times. A fifth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.

Furthermore, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is A super wild dance mode in which the 1st V jackpot game consisting of 3 round games is maintained and then the 2nd time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2. to move to.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is A super wild dance mode in which the second V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is maintained and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2. to move to.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is A super wild dance mode in which the 3rd V jackpot game consisting of 3 round games is maintained, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2. to move to.

In this way, when the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) is executed as a result of jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the second time saving number (J2) is 7 times. A first jackpot game or a second jackpot game (corresponding to a second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game When executed, the second time saving number (J2) is controlled to a normal time saving gaming state (corresponding to the second specific gaming state) in which the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 or 95 times, which is more than 7 times. There is. Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of the executed jackpot game (stopped displayed jackpot special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result), a third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) can be executed, and the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is executed. If the result is a small hit (second result), it is possible to execute the 2nd V jackpot game (corresponding to the 2nd special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the 3rd jackpot game, and it is related to the 2nd special symbol. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (first result), it becomes possible to execute a fourth jackpot game or a fifth jackpot game (equivalent to the third special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the 2nd V jackpot game. There is. Therefore, the type of jackpot game can be varied depending on the type of special symbol and the type of determination result, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the wild dance mode or super wild dance mode (specific game Condition: In the normal time-saving game state, the first special time-saving game state), if it is determined to be a jackpot (first result) as a result of the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol, it is more advantageous to the player than the 2nd V jackpot game. It is possible to execute the fourth jackpot game or the fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the third special game), and if it is determined to be a small hit (second result) as a result of the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol, A 2V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination is made regarding the same second special symbol, the type of jackpot game to be executed can be varied depending on the type of determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, a fourth jackpot game or a fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the 2V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) In the infinite mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state) that is controlled after the game (corresponding to the third special game) is executed, the jackpot (corresponding to the third special game) is 1 result), it is possible to execute the 4th jackpot game or the 5th jackpot game (equivalent to the 3rd special game), and as a result of the jackpot judgment regarding the 2nd special symbol, a small hit (2nd result) ), the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination is made regarding the same second special symbol, the type of jackpot game to be executed can be varied depending on the type of determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Also, in the rush battle mode (normal time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state) or wild dance mode (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state), the jackpot special symbol is the first special symbol. When a jackpot game is executed after being stopped and displayed, the game conditions (second time saving number, remaining number of small winnings, performance mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, the value of the jackpot game in the time-saving game state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the rush battle mode (normal time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and the game to the specific area 53 during the small winning game is stopped. When a jackpot game with the condition of passing a ball is executed, the game conditions (second time saving number, remaining number of small wins, production mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, the value of the small winning game in the time-saving gaming state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and a jackpot game is executed in the super wild dance mode (normal time-saving gaming state), and when the jackpot special symbol is displayed as the second special symbol, is stopped and a jackpot game is executed that requires the game ball to pass through the specific area 53 during the winning game, the game conditions (second time saving number, remaining number of small winnings, presentation mode, etc.) It is now possible to maintain the rank without being downgraded. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconveniences in which the player is disappointed due to a big hit or a small hit in the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in any game mode (normal game state, normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and the jackpot game When this is executed, the game conditions (second time saving number of times, remaining number of small wins, performance mode, etc.) become the highest rank in the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the value of the jackpot with the second special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol and a jackpot game is executed, regardless of the type of jackpot game, the gaming conditions (second time saving number, remaining number of small wins, production mode, etc.) are set to the maximum. Instead of ranking it to a higher rank, for example, if the 4th jackpot special game is executed, it will be the playing condition of Super Ranbu mode, and if the 5th jackpot special game is executed, it will be the playing condition of infinite mode. You may also do so. In this case, the rate at which the fifth jackpot special game is executed may be higher than the rate at which the fourth jackpot special game is executed, or vice versa.

(Production mode set when transitioning from time-saving gaming state to normal gaming state)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the performance mode set when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

In the rush battle mode during the normal time-saving game state, if the time-saving number (any of J1 to J3) or the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the game shifts to the normal game state, the above-mentioned result display (result A transition is made to production mode A without performing a shutter display (suggestion display) or a shutter display (end suggestion display).

In the wild dance mode during the normal time saving gaming state, when the number of time saving times (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and transitioning to the normal gaming state, after the above-mentioned result display (result suggestion display) is performed, After the end of the time-saving game state, the game shifts to a dedicated after-end dedicated mode, and after a predetermined period (for example, 10 variable performances) has elapsed, it shifts to any of performance modes A to C.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the mode shifts to the normal game state, the mode shifts to the production mode A after the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed.

In Super Ranbu mode or Infinite mode during the normal time-saving gaming state, when the number of time-savings (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and transitioning to the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned result display (result suggestion display) will not be displayed. After the time saving game state ends, the game shifts to a dedicated post-end dedicated mode.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small winnings (Z) becomes "1" and a small winning game is performed but a big winning game is not performed, the game shifts to the wild dance mode.

In the Super Ranbu mode during the normal time saving game state or the Ranbu mode transitioned from the infinite mode, if the time saving number (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the transition to the normal game state is made, the above-mentioned result display (Result After the suggestion display) is performed, the game shifts to a dedicated post-end dedicated mode after the time-saving game state ends.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the mode shifts to the normal game state, the mode shifts to the production mode A after the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed.

In the infinite mode during the first special time-saving gaming state, when the number of time-savings (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and transitioning to the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is displayed. Afterwards, the mode shifts to production mode A.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small winnings (Z) becomes "1" and a small winning game is performed but a big winning game is not performed, the game shifts to the wild dance mode.

In the wild dance mode that has transitioned from the infinite mode during the first special time-saving game state, when the time-saving number (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the transition to the normal game state occurs, the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) ) is performed, the mode shifts to presentation mode A.
On the other hand, when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the mode shifts to the normal game state, the mode shifts to the production mode A after the above-mentioned shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed.

In the rush battle mode during the second special time-saving game state, if the number of time-savings (any of J1 to J3) or the remaining number of small wins becomes "0" and the transition to the normal game state occurs, the above-mentioned shutter display (suggestion of termination) After the display) is performed, the mode shifts to presentation mode A.

In addition, in each performance mode during the time saving game state, the second time saving number (J2) is announced (displayed on the image display device, etc.), while the first time saving number (J1), the third time saving number (J3), and the small winning number are announced. The remaining number of times (Z) is not reported (displayed on the image display device, etc.). However, in Rush Battle Mode and Ranbu Mode, the remaining number of small hits (Z) is 1, and in Super Ranbu Mode and Infinite Mode, the remaining number of small hits (Z) is 2, so the mode production depending on the production mode ( The remaining number of small wins (Z) is suggested by the background image according to the performance mode and the image related to the variable performance.

In this way, the time-saving game is started based on the fulfillment of any of the multiple ending conditions (one of the first to third time-saving times becomes "0" or the remaining number of small wins becomes "0"). It is possible to end the state, and in the time-saving gaming state, information regarding the remaining number of small wins is not clearly announced, but the small winning amount is It is designed to suggest information regarding the remaining number of hits. Therefore, it is possible for the player to guess the remaining number of small wins from the mode performance during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the time-saving game state is activated based on any of the multiple ending conditions (either the first to third time-saving times become "0" or the remaining number of small wins becomes "0"). In the time saving game state, it is possible to notify (display, etc. on the image display device) information related to the first ending condition (second time saving number), while the second ending condition (first time saving number, The notification (display, etc. on the image display device) of information related to the third time reduction number, the remaining number of small wins, etc. is restricted (it can be estimated from the mode presentation, but it is not directly displayed). Therefore, since the second end condition cannot be grasped, it is not known when the time-saving gaming state will end, which can heighten the excitement and frustration of the players over the end of the time-saving gaming state, and the game It becomes possible to improve interest.

Further, when transitioning from the rush battle mode in the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the result display (result suggestion display) and shutter display (end suggestion display) are not executed. Therefore, by reducing the feeling of disappointment when the rush battle mode that was entered after a jackpot game ends, it is possible to stimulate the player's desire to play the jackpot game again, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. becomes.

In addition, in the normal time-saving game state where a performance mode other than rush battle mode is set, the number of time-savings (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0", the normal time-saving game state ends normally, and the state shifts to the normal game state. In this case, a result display (result suggestion display) is performed. Therefore, by giving the player a feeling that the normal time-saving gaming state that has been shifted to after the jackpot game has ended, the player's sense of satisfaction and regret can be aroused, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the normal time saving game state where a production mode other than the rush battle mode is set, the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the normal time saving game state ends (if you hit right during the small winning game, the game If an abnormality occurs (such as the game ball not passing through the specific area 53 that the ball is supposed to pass through) and the game transitions to the normal gaming state, the shutter display (end suggestion display) is not performed without displaying the result (result suggestion display). ) is now being carried out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he has done something unnecessary and make him want to play the game normally, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a result display (result suggestion display) is performed in the normal time-saving gaming state and transitioning to the normal gaming state, after the end of the time-saving gaming state, the transition is made to a dedicated post-end dedicated mode, while in the normal time-saving gaming state, When shifting to a normal game state without performing a result display (result suggestion display), the system shifts to a production mode A without shifting to a dedicated after-end exclusive mode after the end of a time-saving game state. Therefore, after the result display is performed, it is possible to leave a feeling in the player's mind that the game has been shifted to a time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of time savings (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0" in the first special time saving game state and the first special time saving game state ends normally and shifts to the normal game state, the result display ( The shutter display (result suggestion display) is not performed, but the shutter display (completion suggestion display) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the result display being performed even though the jackpot game is not being executed, while the shutter display makes it possible to feel that the first special time-saving game state has ended. This can be given to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the first special time-saving game state, the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the first special time-saving game state ends with a blowout. If an abnormality occurs (such as the game ball not passing through the area 53) and the game returns to the normal gaming state, a shutter display (end suggestion display) is now performed instead of a result display (result suggestion display). ing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he has done something unnecessary and make him want to play the game normally, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed in the first special time-saving game state and the transition is made to the normal game state, after the time-saving game state ends, the production mode A It is designed to move to . Therefore, the player is less likely to feel disappointed that the first special time-saving game state ends without executing the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Additionally, when transitioning from the rush battle mode during the second special time-saving game state to the normal game state, the result display (result suggestion display) is not executed, but the shutter display (end suggestion display) is executed. . Therefore, the shutter display can give the player the feeling that the second special time-saving game state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the shutter display (end suggestion display) is performed in the second special time-saving game state and the transition is made to the normal game state, after the time-saving game state ends, the production mode A It is possible to move to. Therefore, the player is less likely to feel disappointed that the first special time-saving game state ends without executing the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the special time-saving game state ends without a jackpot game being executed during the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), the game during the predetermined period (series of advantageous periods) If a jackpot game is executed during the special time-saving game state without executing a result display suggesting the result, and the controlled normal time-saving game state ends after the end of this jackpot game, the result display can be executed. It has become. Therefore, while reducing the player's dissatisfaction when a jackpot game is not executed while the time-saving gaming state continues, it also reduces the player's sense of satisfaction when a jackpot game is executed while the time-saving gaming state continues. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, there is a performance mode that shifts after the end of the normal time-saving game state (post-end exclusive mode or performance mode A), and a performance that shifts after the end of the special time-saving game state (first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state). It is possible to change the mode (only production mode A). Therefore, by increasing the variation of performance after the end of the time-saving game state depending on the type of time-saving game state, the performance effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, instead of switching to Ranbu mode when the remaining number of small hits in Super Ranbu mode or Infinite mode decreases to "1", the second time reduction number (J2) is changed while continuing Super Ranbu mode or Infinite mode. The remaining number of small wins (Z) may be indirectly suggested by displaying "???" or by hiding the second time saving number (J2).

In addition, instead of indicating the remaining number of small wins (Z) through mode effects, etc., information related to the end conditions of the time saving game state (performance mode image corresponding to the second time saving number, second time saving number, etc.) is not displayed. In this way, the remaining number of small wins (Z) may not be completely known.

In addition, if the number of time-saving games (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0" in the normal time-saving gaming state and the normal time-saving gaming state ends normally and transitions to the normal gaming state, the dedicated After the end of the game, the game is moved to production mode A without going to the dedicated mode, and the number of time savings (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0" in the first special time saving game state or the second special time saving game state. When the first special time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state normally ends and the game state is transferred to the normal game state, the game state may be changed to a post-end exclusive mode which becomes exclusive after the time-saving game state ends. Even in this manner, the performance effect can be improved by increasing the performance variations after the end of the time-saving game state depending on the type of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when transitioning from the rush battle mode in the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, a result display (result suggestion display) or a shutter display (end suggestion display) may be performed. In this case, the result will be displayed when the time saving number (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0" and the state enters the normal gaming state. A shutter display may also be performed when transitioning to . In this way, regardless of the performance mode during the normal time-saving gaming state, the display control at the end of the normal time-saving gaming state can be made common, making it possible to increase control efficiency and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, instead of controlling the first special time-saving game state to the infinite mode or the wild dance mode, the first special time-saving game state may be controlled to a special production mode. In this way, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the first special time-saving game state is in effect, and the variety of performances increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of controlling to enter the rush battle mode in the second special time-saving game state, it may be controlled to a performance mode exclusive to the second special time-saving game state. In this way, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the second special time-saving game state is in effect, and the variety of performances increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Command analysis processing of production control section)
The command analysis process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the production control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step E302, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If the command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power ON notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, a notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. If so, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing power-on notification or power restoration notification, and movable presentation device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable Processing is performed to perform an initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined manner, initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined manner, and the like.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related designation command. If it is an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error system specification commands" include unrecoverable error specification command, fraudulent winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door open error start specification command, door open error end specification This includes commands, operation error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notifications according to the type of error specification command received (unrecoverable error notification, unauthorized winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification) etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, processing is performed to update the gaming state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to the gaming state according to the gaming state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of setting a production instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special symbols stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device. conduct. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetch designation command, the received prefetch designation command (special figure schedule fluctuation pattern) is set in the prefetch storage area described later in the sub-RAM 130c, and then the process moves to step E315; if it is not a prefetch designation command, The process moves to step E318.

The "pre-read storage area" is a first pre-read storage section for sequentially storing pre-read information (special figure schedule fluctuation patterns, etc.) based on the first pre-read designation command, and sequentially stores reservation information based on the second pre-read designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing data, and a storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) being executed. The two look-ahead storage units are each divided into first to fourth storage units.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area described above, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to one pending number. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetching storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the second prefetching designation command is received, 2 Prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special symbol determination information execution storage area, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first pre-read storage unit The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the second look-ahead unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. Ru.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing in step E315. Specifically, there is an expectation that a special game will be executed by displaying the pending icon displayed on the image display device or the icon in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon). Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that indicates the degree (possibility) of the icon change effect, and the mode of effect of the icon change effect to be executed. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emission effect determination process. Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the top lamp 10b located at the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is caused to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode, thereby creating a special game. Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute a winning light emitting effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the prize winning light emitting effect will be executed, and the presentation mode of the winning light emitting effect to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over a variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, expectations are made that a jackpot game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed). It determines whether or not to execute a prefetch continuous performance and the type of prefetch continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute the prefetch continuous performance. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed. Note that details of the prefetch continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, processing is performed to determine the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, a variation production pattern, which is a production mode of a variation production executed by a production device including an image display device, is determined, and a production indicating the variation production pattern is determined. Processing is performed to set the instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable production is performed. Note that details of the fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs jackpot preview effect determination processing in step E322. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, whether or not to execute a jackpot preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Also, a performance mode (pattern) of the jackpot preview performance to be executed is determined, and execution information of the jackpot preview performance is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing is performed to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or to change the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon.

The sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for starting the prefetch continuous performance determined in the prefetch continuous performance determination process of step E317 or for changing the performance mode is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol confirmation command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step E327.

The sub CPU 130a performs production symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped performance symbols and ending the variable performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for ending the variable production is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process moves to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the current command analysis process ends.

The "special game system designation commands" include jackpot opening designation commands, jackpot round designation commands, jackpot ending designation commands, small win opening designation commands, small win ending designation commands, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game performance determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining the opening performance of a jackpot game or a small winning game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the round In the case of a specified command, processing is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of an ending specification command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing a round performance, and in the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance. Processing is performed to set the performance instruction command for determining the ending performance of the small winning game and executing the ending performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is ended. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening production, round production, and ending production is performed.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The "executable period of icon change effect" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, that when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the first starting port 45 is received, the normal gaming state is present, and that the second starting port 45 is in a normal gaming state. For example, when a prefetch designation command based on winning a prize in 47 is received, it is a time-saving gaming state (specific gaming state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is a change scenario in the pre-pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received pre-read designation command), that is, whether a change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. Determine whether If there is a change scenario, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command will not be executed, and the process moves to step E315-7; if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E315-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 55) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. The final display mode of one icon is determined from among the following.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) for performing an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for which an icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 56) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41, the final icon display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario are determined. Then, one change scenario is determined from among the plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and changes the winning icon. The icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect (the first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and the second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not to be performed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is to be performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the advance hold includes something that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the reach effect is better when the advance hold does not include a reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than in the case where the icon change effect is included.

In addition, when a prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol is received during the time saving game state, an icon change effect is executed, but even if a prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol is received in the time saving gaming state, The icon change effect may not be executed. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of prefetch specification command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected, and for reference, it corresponds to the prefetch specification command. The contents of the performance of the scheduled fluctuation pattern are described.

The final icon display mode includes a normal icon (white icon) that does not suggest the expectation of a big or small win, and a special icon (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) that suggests the expectation of a big or small win. It is set. Moreover, the expectation level of a big hit or a small hit related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (big hit confirmed).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 55 is that when the prefetch designation command indicates a jackpot, a rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode; When the prefetch designation command indicates a small win, a rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. By doing this, the player will not be overjoyed at the moment when a small win is reached without it being certain that the jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 55 is that if the prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol, which is transmitted only during the time-saving gaming state, indicates a small hit, the red icon One point to note is that the percentage of red icons being determined is higher when it indicates a jackpot than the percentage of red icons being determined. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate between a jackpot and a small win for which it is not certain that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the prefetch designation command indicates a small win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode, but in the small win game of this embodiment, the game ball is hit to the right. As long as the game ball is present, the game ball will pass through the specific area 53 with almost 100% probability and a jackpot game will be executed, so the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's awareness of the small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol that is transmitted only during the time-saving gaming state indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon indicates a small hit. It is preferable that the ratio of the rainbow icon, which indicates a jackpot, is determined to be higher than the ratio of the rainbow icon being determined.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 04, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

The first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that when a jackpot game is executed, even if it is before the predetermined period (for example, one change before) of the variation performance in which the jackpot game is executed. While it is possible to execute an icon change effect (display of a rainbow icon) that suggests in advance that a jackpot game will be executed, when a first special time-saving game state occurs, a first special time-saving game state occurs. One point is that the icon change effect that suggests that something will happen in advance is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot, while avoiding the inconvenience of the first special time-saving gaming state not being able to occur in vain, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Note that the change scenario is determined regardless of whether it is a normal game state (first special symbol icon) or a specific game state (second special symbol icon). state (second special symbol icon), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to the prior change (for example, 20:80 or 0:100, etc.). You can. In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the fluctuation will be higher in the specific gaming state (second special symbol icon) than in the normal gaming state (first special symbol icon). You can.

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state occurs, an icon change effect that suggests in advance that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but the first special time-saving game state An icon change effect (for example, display of a flashing yellow icon, output of a change sound, etc.) indicating that a change occurs may be executed. In this case, before the predetermined period (for example, one variation) of the variable effect in which the jackpot game is executed, the execution of the icon change effect indicating that the first special time-saving game state will occur is restricted (for example, It may be configured such that the change is not executed, or even if it is executed, the change sound is not output, etc.).

(Production control unit's winning lighting effect decision process)
With reference to FIG. 57, the winning light emission effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the winning light emission effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the winning light emission effect. If it is the executable period for the winning light emitting effect, the process moves to step E316-3, and if it is not the winning time light emitting effect executable period, the winning light emitting effect is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it is not the case, the process for determining the light emitting effect at the time of winning this time is ended.

"Period during which the light emission effect can be executed at the time of winning" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, that when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the first starting port 45 is received, the normal gaming state is present, and that the second starting For example, when a prefetch designation command based on winning in the mouth 47 is received, the game is in a time-saving gaming state.

In step E316-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E316- 4, a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a winning light emission effect pattern. Specifically, with reference to the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One winning light emission performance pattern is determined from among the winning light emission performance patterns.

In step E316-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. If the pattern is to execute the light emitting effect when winning, the process moves to step E316-7, and if the pattern is not to execute the light emitting effect when winning, the current light emitting effect determining process is terminated.

In step E316-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a winning light emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emitting effect determining process. As a result, the winning light emitting effect execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the winning light emitting effect is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the winning light emitting effect execution command.

(Light emission pattern determination table when winning a prize)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a winning light emitting effect pattern.

The winning lighting effect pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern, and the selected winning lighting effect pattern. For reference, the performance mode for each winning light emission performance pattern is described.

The winning light emitting effect pattern includes a winning light emitting effect pattern 00 in which the winning light emitting effect is not executed, and winning light emitting effects patterns 01 and 02 in which the winning light emitting effect is executed. In the winning light emission patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

The first feature of the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a high jackpot expectation level is better than the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a low jackpot expectation level. However, one point is that the light-emitting effect when winning a prize is easier to execute. By doing so, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations for the execution of a variable performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the winning light emitting effect is easier to execute in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the winning light emitting pattern determination table shown in FIG. However, when the first special time saving game state occurs, the first special time saving game state can be executed. One of the points is that the winning light emitting effect that suggests in advance that a gaming state will occur is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot, while avoiding the inconvenience of the first special time-saving gaming state not being able to occur in vain, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, it is also possible to provide a light emission effect pattern (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and a confirmation sound is output from the audio output device 9) when a jackpot is confirmed, and in this case, a full rotation reach It is preferable that a winning light emitting effect pattern is determined that will ensure a jackpot at the lowest rate when the above is executed.

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state occurs, the winning light emitting effect that suggests in advance that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed, but the first special time-saving game state It is also possible to perform a lighting effect (for example, flashing blue, outputting a sound effect, etc.) at the time of winning that indicates that a state has occurred. In this case, before the predetermined period (for example, 1 variation before) of the variable effect in which the jackpot game is executed, the execution of the winning light emission effect that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur is restricted (for example, , not executed, or even if executed, no sound effect is output, etc.).

(Pre-read continuous performance determination processing by the performance control unit)
The pre-read continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is ended.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the process moves to step E317-4, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the prefetch zone effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Pre-reading zone production" means performing zone production (display of pre-reading zone background image, display of blue zone image or red thermal zone image, output of zone BGM or thermal zone BGM) over one or more variable productions. This is a performance that continuously suggests the level of expectation for a special game to be executed using a background image, text information, and color information (expected value information), and is a type of pre-read continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed" includes the fact that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone performance in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not in progress, that the game is in a normal game state, and so on. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed, but in the time-saving game state, the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a prefetch zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining a prefetch zone effect scenario. Note that details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each preview scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read zone performance scenario is determined from among the plurality of pre-read zone performance scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch zone effect as a performance scenario in which the prefetch zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch zone effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch zone effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is an executable period for the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the process moves to step E317-9, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the prefetch countdown effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead countdown performance" is a countdown performance (displaying a count image, outputting a count sound) over one or more variable performances to intermittently increase the expectation level for a special game to be executed using text information and sound information. It is a suggestive performance, and is a type of forward-looking continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed" includes the following conditions: there is no advance pending to execute the look-ahead countdown performance, the jackpot game is not in progress, the time-saving game state, etc. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed, but in the time-saving game state, the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the prefetch countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 61) for determining the scenario of the prefetch countdown effect. The details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch countdown performance scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each performance scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read countdown performance scenario is determined from among a plurality of pre-read countdown performance scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch countdown effect as a performance scenario in which the prefetch countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch countdown performance scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch countdown effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch countdown effect is performed. When this process is finished, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is finished.

In this way, the types of look-ahead continuous effects executed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state are made different. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state where the number of reservations is more likely to increase than in the normal gaming state and a short variable time is easily determined, the look-ahead zone effect that is continuously executed over one or more variable effects is not executed. There is. Therefore, the inconvenience that the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance in which it is desired to secure a long performance time in one variable performance does not occur will not occur, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state where the number of reservations is more likely to increase than in the normal gaming state and a short variable time is easily determined, a look-ahead countdown effect that is intermittently executed over one or more variable effects is executed. There is. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown performance that requires a short performance time in one fluctuating performance makes it easier to increase the expectations of the players, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead zone effect may be executed also in the time-saving gaming state, and the look-ahead countdown effect may be executed also in the normal game state.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone performance scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table includes the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for zone performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of look-ahead zone performance in the relevant fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" means that normal zone effects (display of prefetched zone background image, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed, and "heat zone" means that normal zone effects are executed. A heat zone performance (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone BGM) that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance is executed.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include non-execution scenarios (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed, and scenarios in which the zone performance is not executed during the preliminary fluctuation and the zone performance is performed during the fluctuation ( For example, scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a production scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to a production mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of a special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to whether or not the performance mode of the performance in the zone will progress (change), thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance progresses (changes) more easily with this variation than with advance variation. By doing so, it becomes easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can reach its peak during the fluctuations, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the result of the look-ahead zone performance, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

Note that a look-ahead zone effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed may be executed, but a look-ahead zone effect that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed. You can.

(Look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a prefetch countdown performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a prefetch countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table includes the pending number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for the countdown performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of the look-ahead countdown performance for the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Count 3" means that a count image indicating "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 2" means that a count image indicating "2" is displayed and a count sound is output. "Count 1" means displaying a count image indicating "1" and outputting a count sound, and "count 0" means displaying a count image indicating "0". and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the look-ahead countdown effect is executed not only when there is a big hit, but also when there is a small hit (a planned fluctuation pattern that makes you expect a small win). Here are some things that are possible. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not a small winning game in which a jackpot game will be executed by the ball entering the specific area 53 will be executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

A second feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the maximum value of the count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. By doing so, the player will have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 61 is that the performance mode of the look-ahead countdown effect is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small win. By doing so, the player will have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the result of the look-ahead countdown performance, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a small win, the number of rounds and time saving times of the jackpot game to be transferred when a game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small win game is specified or countdown effected in an unpredictable manner. However, when a game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small winning game, the countdown effect is executed in a manner that allows the number of rounds and time saving times of the jackpot game to be transitioned to to be specified or predicted. You can do it like this. For example, the font and size of the count image may be different depending on whether the number of rounds or time savings is relatively small and when the number of rounds or time savings is relatively large, or the type or volume of the count sound may be different. You can.

Note that a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed may be executed, but a look-ahead countdown effect that suggests that the first special time-saving game state will occur is not executed. You can.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step E321-3, and if it is not the normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state), the process moves to step E321-7.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance is the remaining portion of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. If it is the remaining amount of the second special symbol, the process moves to step E321-4, and if it is not the remaining amount of the second special symbol (fluctuating display of the first special symbol), step E321- Processing moves to step 6.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the remaining amount of the second special symbol is the one at the normal end of the normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number (J2) is set to 7 times. do. It is not the normal time saving game state in which the second time saving number (J2) is set to 7 times (it is the one at the end of a flat tire, or the normal time saving number is set to 55 times or more) (or in the special time-saving game state), the process moves to step E321-6, and the game is in the normal time-saving game state where the second time-saving number (J2) is set to 7 times. If so, in step E321-5, the variable effect pattern determination table for remaining reservation (see FIG. 63(c)) is selected, and the process moves to step E321-14. In addition, the details of the fluctuation performance pattern determination table for remaining reservation will be described later.

In step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a selects the normal variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and moves the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is the normal time saving gaming state. If it is not the normal time-saving game state (it is a special time-saving game state), the process moves to step E321-13, and if it is the normal time-saving game state, in step E321-8, the current variable performance is the normal time-saving game. It is determined whether the state is a pre-final variation performance (the number of remaining time reductions is 1 or more). If it is not a pre-final variation performance (it is a final variation production), the process moves to step E321-10, and if it is a pre-final variation production, in step E321-9, the normal time-saving pre-final variation A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) is selected, and the process moves to step E321-14.

In step E321-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current mode is rush battle mode. If it is the rush battle mode, in step E321-11, the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the normal time reduction final variation (see FIG. 63(a)) is selected, and the process is moved to step E321-14, where the rush battle is started. If it is not the mode, in step E321-12, the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the normal time saving final variation (see FIG. 63(b)) is selected, and the process moves to step E321-14. Note that the details of the variation effect pattern determination table for the normal time saving final variation will be described later.

In step E321-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a special time-saving variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and moves the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-14, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-15, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuation production pattern judgment table for time-saving final fluctuation)
FIG. 63(a) is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table 1 for the final time-saving variation that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern in the final variation production in the normal time-saving gaming state (rush battle mode). FIG. 63(b) is a diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination table 2 for the final time-saving variation that is referred to when determining the variable performance pattern in the final variable production in the normal time-saving gaming state (other than rush battle mode). .

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the variation effect pattern determination table for time-saving final variation includes the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command, the current second special The pre-reading result of remaining symbols, the selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and the selected variable performance pattern are associated with each other, and the performance configuration of each variable performance pattern is described for reference.

The "final battle introduction effect" is an introductory effect to the final battle effect in which the player faces off against an enemy character for a big win or a small win in a variable effect where the time-saving game state (rush battle mode) ends.
"Final battle SP reach" is a special SP reach effect that performs the final battle effect described above, in which the two effect symbols 70a forming the reach state are reduced to the upper corners of the image display device. , and a battle performance where you confront enemy characters.
"Final battle SP reach with guaranteed victory" is a special SP reach effect that performs the final battle effect described above, and the two effect symbols 70a forming the reach state are shrunk and displayed on the upper side of the image display device. The character moves to both corners and performs a battle performance in which it is certain that the character will win against the enemy character.

The "defeat performance" is a performance that suggests that the enemy character has been defeated in the final battle performance.
The "victory performance" is a performance that suggests victory over the enemy character in the final battle performance.

"Result display" is a performance that displays the results of games during a series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving gaming state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal gaming state or special time-saving gaming state, called the so-called first win. .
"Special result display" is basically the same as the result display described above, but it suggests that it will be a big hit or a small win due to the fluctuating performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol when transitioning to the normal gaming state. The results are displayed as a type of look-ahead presentation.

"Shutter closing (end suggestion display)" is a performance that suggests that the time-saving gaming state ends by displaying a shutter image closing. Specifically, the shutter image can be used to display the performance pattern 70a, background image, etc. By blocking the effect image, the effect is made to appear to the player as if he had lost.
"Resurrection effect" is a effect that announces (suggests) a jackpot or small hit after pretending to be a loss. Specifically, by smashing the shutter image, a combination of jackpot effects appears. It is a performance that

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. There are several points to choose from. By doing so, it is possible to efficiently improve the player's expectations in the final variable performance in the time-saving game state (rush battle mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. One point is that battle effects may be performed. By doing this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security from the start of the battle performance (final battle SP reach), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation performance pattern determination table 1 for time saving final variation shown in FIG. 63(a) is that the variation performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is a small hit or a jackpot. In some cases, even if the final change in the time-saving game state (rushing battle mode) results in a loss, a victory-confirming battle performance may be executed as a type of look-ahead performance. By doing so, it is possible to execute a variable performance with a surprising effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 63(b) is that the result display from the end suggestion effect is always executed in the final variation of the time-saving game state (other than the rush battle mode). One point is that a variable performance pattern is selected. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the results of the games during a series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the interest in the games.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. One point is that it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to surprise the player by making him think that the normal time-saving gaming state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation performance pattern determination table 2 for time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 63(b) is that the variation performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state results in a jackpot or small win. One point is that a special result display may be performed as a kind of look-ahead effect that suggests that. By doing this, it is possible to stimulate the joy of the players by pretending that the time-saving gaming state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table for remaining hold)
FIG. 63(c) is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for remaining reservation that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern in a variable performance related to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. .

As shown in FIG. 63(c), the remaining holding variation effect pattern determination table includes the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern. The variable effect patterns that will be displayed are associated with each other, and the effect structure of each variable effect pattern is described for reference.

"Result continuation" is an effect that continues displaying the result at the final change in the time-saving game state (other than rush battle mode).
The "resurrection performance" is a performance that suggests that the result display at the final change in the time-saving game state (other than the rush battle mode) will be revived and become a jackpot or a small win.
"Resurrection long performance" is a performance that is performed over a longer period of time than the above-mentioned resurrection performance, in which the result display is revived from the final change in the time-saving gaming state (other than rush battle mode) and suggests a big or small win. It becomes.

The first feature of the variation performance pattern determination table for remaining hold shown in FIG. 63(b) is that the result display is continued by taking over the result display in the final variation of the time-saving game state (other than rush battle mode). There are several points. By doing this, a series of performances can be performed from the final change in the time-saving game state (other than the rush battle mode), and it is possible to improve the performance effect before and after the end of the time-saving game state.

The second feature of the variation performance pattern determination table for remaining suspension shown in FIG. 63(b) is that the performance content (result display) in the final variation of the time-saving game state (other than rush battle mode) is taken over and revived or revived. One point is the execution of long performances. By doing this, a series of performances can be performed from the final change in the time-saving game state (other than the rush battle mode), and it is possible to improve the performance effect before and after the end of the time-saving game state.

(Special time-saving performance processing by the performance control unit)
The special time-saving performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of special time-saving performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time saving game state is in progress. If it is not in the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step E750-2, and if it is in the time-saving gaming state, a special time-saving effect (suggesting that RWM clearing, which will be described later, is not being performed (it is deferred)) The current special time-saving performance processing is terminated as not to execute the RWM clear negative performance (indication of an activation counter suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until shifting to the special time-saving game state).

In step E750-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect has been started. If the fluctuating effect has not started, the process moves to step E750-16, and if the fluctuating effect has started, in step E750-3, it is checked whether RWM clear was performed when the power was turned on (power-on specified command was received). If RWM clearing has been performed, the process moves to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not performed, and if RWM clearing has been performed, the process moves to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is any history of a jackpot game being executed from the time the power was turned on to the present (whether or not a jackpot game was executed on the same day). If there is a jackpot history, the RWM clear negative performance is not executed and the process moves to step E750-13, and if there is no jackpot history, the process moves to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations until the transition to the first special time saving gaming state is within a predetermined number (here, 100 times). If the number is not within the predetermined number, the process moves to step E750-16 as a special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect, activation counter display) is not executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-6. Transfer processing.

In step E750-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations since the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the first number, the process moves to step E750-10, and if the number of fluctuations is the first number, in step E750-7, it is determined whether or not to execute the RWM clear negative effect, and whether to perform it. Whether or not to display the counter is determined by lottery (eg, 1/2 ratio).

In step E750-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it has been determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect or the activation counter display. If it is determined not to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, the process moves to step E750-16, and if it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, step E750-9 At this point, an effect execution command corresponding to the determined result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving performance (RWM clear negative performance and/or display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations since the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the second number, the process moves to step E750-16, and if the number of fluctuations is the second number, it is determined whether the RWM clear negative effect is executed and whether the activation counter is displayed. decide. Specifically, if the RWM clear negative effect has not been executed, it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect, and if the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it is determined to execute the display of the activation counter.

The sub CPU 130a sets an effect execution command according to the determination result in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving performance (RWM clear negative performance and/or display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is the second number, the process moves to step E750-15, and if the number of fluctuations is not the second number, in step E750-14, whether the normal time-saving gaming state has been shifted to production mode A or not. It is determined whether or not (all the variable performances according to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol have been completed). If the normal time-saving game state has shifted to production mode A, the process moves to step E750-15, and if the normal time-saving game state has not shifted to production mode A, the process moves to step E750-16.

In step E750-15, the sub CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a production execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving production (in this case, display of an activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (whether the symbol confirmation command has been received). If the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the process moves to step E750-17, and if the performance symbols are not stopped and displayed, the current special time-saving performance process is ended.

In step E750-17, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, the current special time-saving effect processing is ended; if the activation counter is being displayed, the activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in step E750-18. do. As a result, an activation counter subtraction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and processing for subtracting the value of the activation counter is performed. When this process is finished, the current special time-saving performance process is ended.

In this way, RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) is executed when the power is turned on while the fluctuation performance is being executed a predetermined number of times (before the predetermined number of times before the first special time-saving gaming state is activated) from the time the power is turned on. It is now possible to perform an RWM clear negative effect that suggests that the data is not cleared (deferred). Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first special time-saving game state occurs by referring to the number of changes on the previous day, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, a plurality of execution timings for the RWM clear negative effect are set, and if it is executed at any timing, it will not be executed again at any other timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectations regarding at what timing the RWM clear negative performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display a suggested activation counter by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the first special time saving game state (activation countdown effect can be executed). Therefore, the player can grasp when the first special time-saving game state occurs, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to provide motivation for continuing the game, and it is also possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, the activation counter is not displayed until the variable performance is executed a predetermined number of times (minimum 50 times, maximum 100 times) from the time the power is turned on (regardless of whether RWM is cleared or not). Therefore, for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on at the start of business hours at the game parlor, it is impossible to determine whether the RWM clear is not being executed or not. This makes it possible to suppress inconveniences such as a decrease in In addition, the player can also play the game with a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game will be fixed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the time saving game state, the activation counter is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's attention is directed toward the first special time-saving game state even though he is in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Furthermore, even if the time-saving game state changes to the normal game state, the activation counter is not displayed until the game changes to production mode A (during result display or shutter display). Therefore, it is possible to leave a feeling of having transitioned from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the activation counter display after the transition to production mode A, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game with a fresh start, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the activation counter is subtracted not at the start of a fluctuating performance where a jackpot preview performance or look-ahead performance is likely to be executed (started), but when a performance pattern stops where a jackpot notice performance or look-ahead performance is less likely to be executed (started) than at the start of variation. (countdown), it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power supply that was stopped during the normal gaming state after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state is restarted and the gaming control state is restored to the state before the power outage, whether or not the RWM is cleared after that. While it is possible to execute the RWM clear negative performance (specific performance), the power supply that was stopped during the normal gaming state after the end of the first special time-saving gaming state is restarted, and the control state of the game is interrupted. When the previous state is restored, subsequent execution of an RWM clear negative effect (specific effect) relating to the presence or absence of RWM clear is restricted. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the RWM clear negative performance, it is possible to notify the player of useful information such as the fact that the first special time-saving gaming state has ended and the presence or absence of the RWM clear, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, the power supply that occurred while being controlled by any of the performance modes (performance modes A to C, countdown mode, exclusive mode after completion) in the normal gaming state is restarted, and the control state of the game is interrupted. When the previous state is restored, it is controlled to the performance mode A which is the initial performance mode, but when it is controlled to a performance mode other than the performance mode A (normal game state) after the end of the normal time saving game state If the power supply that was stopped during the period is restarted and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power outage and is controlled to production mode A, then an RWM clear negative production (specific On the other hand, the power supply that was stopped while being controlled to a performance mode (normal game state) other than the performance mode A after the end of the first special time-saving game state is resumed and the game can be played. When the control state is restored to the state before the power outage and is controlled to production mode A, subsequent execution of RWM clear negative production (specific production) related to the presence or absence of RWM clear is restricted. It looks like this. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the RWM clear negative performance, it is possible to notify the player of useful information such as the fact that the first special time-saving gaming state has ended and the presence or absence of the RWM clear, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Note that instead of subtracting (counting down) the activation counter when the performance symbols stop, the activation counter may be subtracting (countdown) at the start of the variable performance. In this case, the activation counter may be subtracted from when the performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate until it completely shifts to high-speed fluctuation (becomes a constant speed), or when the performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate, it may cause fluctuations such as rising. The scrolling (variation) may be performed after the pre-movement is performed, and the activation counter may be decremented by the time the pre-variation action is completed.

In addition, instead of executing an RWM clear negative effect that suggests that RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) is not being executed (deferred), the setting value is changed (setting change accompanied by RWM clearing is not executed). A setting change suggestion performance may be executed to suggest that the RWM clear has been changed (instead of a setting change suggestion effect), or both the RWM clear denial effect and the setting change suggestion effect may be executed by lottery. However, it is preferable to restrict that both the RWM clear negative performance and the setting change suggestion performance are performed in the same variable performance.

(Execution period of time-saving suggestion production that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the first special time-saving gaming state)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance that indicates the possibility (occurrence timing) of being controlled to the first special time-saving game state for each variable performance pattern.

The "time-saving suggestion performance" includes a game count display that shows the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, an activation counter display that counts down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the first special time-saving game state, a countdown mode performance, etc. .

As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the shortening variation effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the time saving suggestion effect is executed during the shortening variation and the result display (temporary stop and permanent stop of the effect symbols).
As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the normal variation effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect is during the normal variation (including pseudo variation) and during the result display.
As shown in FIG. 65(c), when the normal reach variation performance is executed in the normal gaming state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance is during the normal variation, during the normal reach performance, and during the result display.

As shown in FIG. 65(d), when the 1st SP reach variation performance is executed in the normal gaming state, during normal variation, during normal reach performance, during development performance, during 1st SP reach performance, and eye catch performance (return performance) The period during which the time-saving suggestion effect is executed is during and while the results are being displayed.
As shown in FIG. 65(e), when the 2nd SP reach variation performance is executed in the normal gaming state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance is during normal variation, normal reach performance, development performance, and result display. During the 2SP reach performance and the eye catch performance, the time-saving suggestion performance is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 65(f), when the normal → SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the normal gaming state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance is during normal variation, normal reach performance, development performance, and result display. The time-saving suggestion performance is not performed during the SPSP reach performance and the eye-catching performance.
As shown in FIG. 65(g), when the SP → SPSP reach variation performance is executed in the normal gaming state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance is during normal variation, normal reach performance, development performance, and result display. During SP reach performance, development performance, SPSP reach performance, and eye catch performance, time-saving suggestion performance is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 65(h), when the full rotation reach variation effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect is during normal variation, normal reach effect, development effect, and result display; During the rotating reach performance and the eye-catching performance (return performance), the time-saving suggestion performance is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 65(i), when a variable performance is executed in the time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, first special time-saving game state, second special time-saving game state), which type of variable performance is executed? Even in the case where the time-saving suggestion performance is not executed, the time-saving suggestion performance is not executed during the performance before the result is displayed and while the result is displayed.

In addition, the jackpot expectation level for each variation performance pattern is as follows: Shortened variation performance = Normal variation performance < Normal reach variation performance < 1st SP reach variation performance < 2nd SP reach variation performance < Normal → SPSP reach variation performance < SP → SPSP reach variation performance < It is set to increase in order of full rotation reach variation performance (big hit guaranteed).

In addition, the hold icon is hidden during SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, and full rotation reach performance, and the icon is hidden during SPSP reach performance and full rotation reach performance.

In this way, it is possible to execute the time-saving suggestion performance that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the first special time-saving gaming state while the variable performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting that the first special time-saving gaming state may occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to improve the operation of the gaming machine. is also possible.

In addition, for predetermined variable effects that result in a loss (shortened variable effects, normal variable effects, normal reach variable effects, 1st SP reach variable effects, etc.), there is an execution period for the time-saving suggestion effect, but there is a non-execution period for the time-saving suggestion effect. On the other hand, predetermined variable performances that result in a jackpot (2nd SP reach variation production, normal → SPSP reach variation production, SP → SPSP reach variation production, full rotation reach variation production, etc.) include the execution period of the time-saving suggestion production and the time-saving There is a non-execution period of suggestive performance. Therefore, depending on the type of variable performance, it is possible to make people more aware of the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state than the jackpot game, or to make them more aware of the execution of the jackpot game than the first special time-saving game state, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in the variable performance in which the normal reach performance is executed, there is an execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance, but there is no non-execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance, and the reach performance is higher than the SP reach performance, which has higher jackpot expectations than the normal reach performance. The variable performances that are executed include an execution period of time-saving suggestion performances and a non-execution period of time-saving suggestion performances. Therefore, depending on the type of fluctuating performance in which the reach performance is performed, it is possible to make the user conscious of the occurrence of the first special time-saving game state rather than the jackpot game, or to make the execution of the jackpot game more conscious than the first special time-saving game state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, during the execution of a specific performance (such as the first SP reach performance) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game in the variable performance, the hold icon is not displayed, but the time-saving suggestion performance can continue to be executed. Therefore, while it is possible to make it easier for the player to concentrate on a specific effect, even if the player loses as a result of executing the specific effect, the player is dissatisfied by making the player think that the first special time-saving game state is approaching. It is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, variable performances in which specific performances (second SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, etc.) that make you expect to execute a jackpot game during the normal gaming state include execution periods of time-saving suggestion performances and time-saving While there is a non-execution period of suggestive performances, there are variable performances in which specific performances (2nd SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, etc.) that make you expect to execute a jackpot game during the normal time-saving gaming state are executed. , there is no execution period for the time-saving suggestion performance, but there is a non-execution period for the time-saving suggestion performance. Therefore, in the normal gaming state in which the first special time-saving gaming state may occur, the player can be made aware of the possibility that the first special time-saving gaming state may occur, and the In the normal time-saving gaming state which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to make the player conscious of the advantageous state of the normal time-saving gaming state and prevent him from being aware of the first special time-saving gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, the time-saving suggestion performance is not executed during the execution of specific performances (second SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, etc.) that make you expect to execute a jackpot game in the fluctuating performance, and the subsequent result display period will be shortened. It is designed to be the execution period of the suggestive performance. Therefore, even if the player loses as a result of executing the specific performance, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player by making him think that the first special time-saving game state is approaching, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, the hold icon remains displayed during the execution of the development performance that makes you expect to execute a jackpot game (development performance before the SP reach performance), but during the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance in which the hold icon is hidden. It may be done as follows.

In addition, while the 2nd SP reach effect that makes people expect to execute a jackpot game is a non-execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect, the execution of the time-saving suggestion effect is such that the hold icon is hidden while the 2nd SP reach effect is being executed. It may be a period, or the execution period of the time-saving suggestion effect in which the pending icon and the icon are hidden may be the period during which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is being executed, which makes people expect to execute a jackpot game.

In addition, the result display period after the non-execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance in the variable performance is the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance, but in the case of a loss, it becomes the execution period of the time-saving suggestion performance, and in the case of a jackpot, the time-saving suggestion performance is performed. It may be set as a non-performance period.

(Example of effect when look-ahead effect is executed during normal gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 66, an example of a performance when a prefetch performance is executed during the normal gaming state will be described. Here, it is assumed that an icon change effect and a look-ahead zone effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that results in a loss (execution of the fluctuating effect), a game ball enters the first start opening 45 and the first pending number changes from "1" to " 2", the number in the first pending number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a look-ahead effect (here, an icon change effect, A white icon (pending icon HI) is additionally displayed as a preview target of the pre-reading zone effect). In addition, in the lower left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70, the number of variable displays (variable effects) executed after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot game, which is a type of time-saving suggestion effect described above, is displayed. The number of times GK is displayed.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed at a loss ("814"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is deleted. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) that results in a loss is started, as shown in FIG. 66(c), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. , the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. The first one is displayed as the relevant icon TI.

At this time, an icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display section 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the pre-reading zone effect is started and the background image changes to the pre-reading zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed at a loss ("531"), and the corresponding symbol displayed in the icon display area 70C is stopped. Icon TI is deleted. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) that results in a jackpot starts, as shown in FIG. 66(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. Then, the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. is displayed as the relevant icon TI, and changes to a red icon (special icon).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased) and the prefetch zone effect is interrupted.

Then, when the final stage of the second SP reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a success performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the presentation position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" (here, it is a jackpot). (This will be announced).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the winning successful production is completed, the production pattern 70a is set to the special appearance common to the small hit and the jackpot ( "555"), the prefetch zone effect is resumed, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. Furthermore, the number of games GK is also redisplayed.

After that, when a temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. , the special symbol TZ stops and displays a jackpot number ("555") that does not include "V" indicating a small win. Furthermore, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, the final phase of the 2nd SP reach effect (the execution timing of the effect that decides whether or not it is a loss) is decided and the failure effect is started and the ally character C2 becomes the enemy. An effect is performed in which the character loses to the character C3. After that, when the character screen "Defeat" is displayed and the winning result is notified and the winning failure performance ends, the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the reaching loss result (for example, "565"). become. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

In this way, in the case of a jackpot in the normal gaming state, pre-read effects (icon change effects, pre-read zone effects, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectations when a jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when look-ahead effect ends midway during normal gaming state)
FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance when the prefetch performance ends midway during the normal gaming state. Here, it is assumed that the icon change effect and the prefetch zone effect are executed as a result of the prefetch determination based on the winning in the first start opening 45.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the first reserved number display area 70E is decreases from "2" to "1", the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. will be displayed as .

At this time, an icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display section 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the pre-reading zone effect is started and the background image changes to the pre-reading zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "0" to "1", and after that, when the variable time elapses, the number shown in FIG. 67(b) increases. As shown, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed when the result is a loss ("531"), and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol that results in a loss starts, the look-ahead zone effect ends midway and the background image changes to the normal one, as shown in FIG. 67(c). At the same time as returning to the medium background image, the icon change effect is terminated midway and the blue icon returns to the normal icon. Further, the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the second reservation number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". In addition, since the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol has started in the normal gaming state, the icon is not displayed.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67(d), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed at a loss ("632"), and the corresponding symbol displayed in the icon display area 70C is stopped. Icon TI is deleted. Further, here, the variable display of the second special symbol has ended instead of the variable display of the first special symbol, but 1 is added to the number of games GK.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed and the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that becomes a jackpot is started, as shown in FIG. 67(e), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. Then, the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. and is displayed as the corresponding icon TI.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased).

Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased).

Then, when the final stage of the second SP reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a success performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3 is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the production position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" (here, it is a jackpot). ).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the winning successful production is completed, the production pattern 70a is set to the special appearance common to the small hit and the jackpot ( "555"), the prefetch zone effect is resumed, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. Furthermore, the number of games GK is also redisplayed.

After that, when the temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. , the special symbol TZ stops and displays a jackpot number ("555") that does not include "V" indicating a small win. Furthermore, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, the final phase of the 2nd SP reach effect (the execution timing of the effect that decides whether or not it is a loss) is decided and the failure effect is started and the ally character C2 becomes the enemy. An effect is performed in which the character loses to the character C3. After that, when the character screen "Defeat" is displayed and the winning result is notified and the winning failure performance ends, the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the reaching loss result (for example, "565"). become. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

In this way, during the execution of a pre-reading effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect, etc.) that makes the player expect to execute a jackpot game over one or more variable effects that are started based on winning in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and variable display of the second special symbol is started, the pre-read performance is ended midway. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes unclear which variable display the pre-read performance is intended for, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the pre-reading performance that started based on the winning in the first starting opening 45, the winning in the second starting opening 47 will not be terminated midway through the pre-reading presentation. The look-ahead presentation may be terminated midway at the time when the first special symbol is displayed, or the first special may be stopped after the variable time of the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed at the time when the second start opening 47 was won. The pre-reading effect may be terminated midway when the symbols are stopped and displayed, or the pre-reading effect may be terminated when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

(Example of effect when variable effect is executed after transitioning to rush battle mode)
With reference to FIG. 68, an example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transitioning to the rush battle mode will be described.

When the ending of the third jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 68(a), a normal time-saving entry effect that suggests a normal time-saving game state is executed, and also to draw the player's attention. An alert notification will be issued. Specifically, a forget-to-take caution image TG is displayed that warns against forgetting to take out a card (storage medium) that can identify the balance of value from a lending device that performs game ball lending communication with the gaming machine 1. .

Thereafter, when the display period of the forget-to-take caution image has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 68(b), an addictive caution image NG is displayed to warn against getting too absorbed in the game. Then, when the ending time of the third jackpot game has passed, 7 times is set as the second time saving number (J2), the first pending number (U1) is "2", and the second pending number (U2) is " 0'', the normal time saving game state is started, and the rush battle mode background image, the first right-hand hitting image MG1 that urges to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the second time saving number of times (J2) are displayed. The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "7 remaining times".

In addition, during the time saving game state, the game number GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable effects) executed after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot game, the first time saving number (J1), and the third time saving number (J3). ), the remaining number of small wins (Z) will not be displayed, but the remaining number of small wins (Z) will be displayed depending on the production image according to the production mode (here, the background image according to the rush battle mode and the image related to the variable production). It is suggested that is "1".

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 68(c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the first pending The number in the display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the icon is instantly displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, due to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect), the time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the second time saving number (J2) maintains the state of "7 remaining times", and the rush battle reach effect is never executed.

At this time, when three game balls enter the second starting port 47 and the second reserved number increases from "0" to "3", as shown in FIG. 68(d), the second reserved number display area The number 70F increases from "0" to "3", and three white icons (pending icons HI) are additionally displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D.

Then, when the variable time has passed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as a losing number ("513"), as shown in FIG. do. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 68(f), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second pending number The number in the display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one of the pending icons HI is displayed in the corresponding icon display area 70C. Displayed as icon TI. Further, the time saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "7 times remaining" to "6 times".

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 68(g), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 68(h), a rush battle reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 battle is started, and the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are displayed. will be hidden (erased). At this time, a character image "First Battle" indicating the number of executions of the rush battle reach effect is displayed.

At this time, two game balls enter the second starting port 47 and the second pending number increases from "2" to "4", but the second pending icon display area 70D is hidden (erased). Therefore, no additional pending icon will be displayed.

After that, at the final stage of the rush battle reach performance (timing of execution of the performance to decide whether or not to lose), a failure performance is started and a performance in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 68 ( As shown in i), the message "Defeat" is displayed on the screen to inform you that you have lost.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as a losing number ("565"), as shown in FIG. do. Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, every time the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is started, the effects shown in FIGS. At the same time as being subtracted, the number of the character image indicating the number of executions of the rush battle reach effect is also updated (second battle → third battle → fourth battle, etc.).

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the normal time-saving gaming state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving gaming state is generated, the right hit notification is performed before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs (during the jackpot game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to a left-handed hit when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when generating a normal time-saving game state, regardless of whether or not there is a pending memory, a performance mode (here, rush battle mode) corresponding to the time-saving state is set according to the ending of the jackpot game, and the performance is The background image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the normal time-saving gaming state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed in a state where the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are hidden. Therefore, it is possible to use the time-saving state in a new mood without worrying about the result of the previous variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a normal time-saving gaming state is generated, an attention-raising effect (displaying a forgetting caution image TG, displaying an engrossed caution image NG) to alert the player is performed, and then a performance corresponding to the time-saving state ( Changes in the background image, display of the remaining time saving number image KG, right hit notification, variable effects according to the time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to the rush battle mode, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively alert the players.

In addition, at the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, even if the player is waiting for a customer with no pending memory, the BGM corresponding to the production mode for the time-saving state is audibly output, but after a predetermined period of time, it is muted ( (audible output is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the performance effect is immediately drastically reduced even when the player is in a waiting state with no pending memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the player is waiting for a customer at the start of the normal time-saving gaming state that has transitioned from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the production mode of the normal time-saving gaming state is muted without being audibly output. Good too. In this case, when a game ball enters the starting slot from the customer waiting state and a pending memory occurs and the variable performance is started, if the BGM corresponding to the performance mode of the normal time-saving gaming state is audibly output. good.

Also, although the warning performance is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the warning performance may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game to the normal time saving game state, or immediately after the start of the normal time saving state. (during the first fluctuation effect), or the forgetting caution image TG and the engrossed caution image NG may be displayed in order during the attention raising effect (whichever may be displayed first).

In addition, in the variation presentation of the first special symbol that is executed when there is no second pending memory and there is the first pending memory at the start of the normal time saving gaming state, the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is performed. However, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ may be executed without executing the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. In this way, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by the fact that the second time saving number (J2) is not subtracted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variation presentation of the first special symbol that is executed when there is no second suspension memory and there is the first suspension memory at the start of the normal time saving gaming state, the special symbol TZ is displayed without executing the variation display of the production symbol 70a. When performing only the fluctuation display, if it is a loss, the fluctuation display is executed with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, shortened fluctuation, super shortened fluctuation, etc.), and if it is a win, the fluctuation display is performed with a longer fluctuation time than in the case of a loss. A special performance may be performed.

In addition, the right-handed hit notification is not performed during the time-saving entry performance, but by displaying the first right-handed hit image MG1, the right-handed hit notification is always performed from the jackpot game to the normal time-saving game state. You can.

(Example of a performance when the fluctuating performance in the final round of rush battle mode results in a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 69, an example of a performance in the case where a jackpot is achieved in the fluctuating performance in the final round of the rush battle mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the variable time in the variable display (fluctuating effect) of the second special symbol one time before the final round in the rush battle mode has elapsed, and the second special symbol stops at the losing special symbol. When displayed, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at a loss ("676"). Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol, which is the final round of the rush battle mode, starts, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. , the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, due to the final change in time saving, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "last", and the storage prompts you to save the second reservation memory (increase the second reservation number) by hitting right. A promotion image SG is displayed. This storage promotion image SG is an image that is displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a as much as possible, and is a count image (here, "09 :99'') will be displayed, and a countdown will be displayed as time passes.

After that, when one game ball enters the second starting port 47, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "1" to "2", as shown in FIG. A white icon (hold icon HI) is additionally displayed on the second display section 70D2 of the icon display area 70D. Since the pre-reading result of the second reserved memory (special figure judgment information) stored at this time is a jackpot, the winning light emission effect is started and the top lamp 10b lights up in yellow, and the sound output device 9 outputs the sound effect “Pikon”. ♪” is output.

In addition, when two game balls enter the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 69(d), the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "2" to "4", A white icon (pending icon HI) is additionally displayed on the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4 of the icon display area 70D. In addition, the characters "Save by hitting right" in the second storage promotion image SG2 change to "MAX!!" indicating that the second reservation number (U2) has reached the upper limit ("4"). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the count image of the storage promotion image SG becomes "00:00" and the countdown ends, and then the storage promotion image SG is deleted.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 69(g), a final battle reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 have a final battle is started, and the second pending icon display area 70D And the icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased). At this time, a text image "Final Battle" indicating the number of executions of the battle reach effect is displayed.

Thereafter, when the final phase of the special SP reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a success performance is started, and a performance is performed in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the production position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin", and the final attack is directed at the enemy character. You will be notified that there was a hit.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the winning success performance is completed, as shown in FIG. ) will be notified. Then, when the variable time has passed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as a jackpot ("555"), as shown in FIG. 69(j). do. Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, in the last variable performance in the normal time-saving game state, a storage promotion performance (display of storage promotion image SG, countdown display) that encourages storing the second reservation memory (increasing the second reservation number) by hitting the right hand. is now executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the second reservation memory is stored before the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

In addition, in the storage promotion performance, by displaying a countdown, it is possible to make the player strongly aware of saving the second reservation memory (increasing the number of second reservations) by hitting the right hand, and the player can avoid losses. This makes it possible to suppress exposure to

In addition, when the second number of reservations (U2) reaches the upper limit in the storage promotion effect, the words "Save by hitting right" will be displayed in a display mode (" MAX!!”). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from firing the game ball uselessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in rush battle mode, which is the normal time-saving game state, when the variable display of the second and final special symbol that ends the normal time-saving game state is executed, the final battle reach effect is always executed. There is. Therefore, even if the normal time-saving gaming state ends due to a loss, the player can be sufficiently entertained and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, during the time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to win a game ball to the second starting port 47, the pre-read result of the second reservation memory (special figure determination information) based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is a small hit. In this case, it is possible to perform a winning lighting effect (pre-reading effect) targeting the reserved memory that becomes the small win. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not a small win game that may lead to a jackpot game will be executed in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a countdown display is executed in the storage promotion effect, but the gauge image is displayed for a shorter period than the time until the reach effect starts, and the length of the gauge is shortened as time passes. It is also possible to perform display effects such as In addition, in addition to lighting a specific light emitting means for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect starts, the color of the light emitted changes as time passes (for example, lighting blue → lighting yellow → lighting red). It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect.

(Example of production when the normal time-saving game state with rush battle mode set ends)
With reference to FIG. 70, a presentation example will be described in which the normal time saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends when the time saving number (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0".

Here, the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, which is the final time saving fluctuation, is started, and a continuous battle effect in which a battle is performed over multiple fluctuation displays is executed, and as shown in FIG. 70(a), a continuous battle It is assumed that a losing final battle reach performance, which is the last stage of the performance, is being executed.

After that, at the final stage of the final battle reach performance (timing of execution of the performance to decide whether or not to lose), a failure performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 70 ( As shown in b), the message "Defeat" is displayed on the screen to inform you that you have lost.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the decision failure effect ends, the relevant icon and the hold icon are redisplayed, and the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a temporarily stopped state at the reach miss roll ("565"). , After that, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed when the number of reach misses ("565"), and the time-saving gaming state ends with four second pending memories remaining. Then, the game returns to the normal gaming state. In addition, the icon is deleted, and the first right-handed image MG1 is also deleted.

After that, when the stop time has passed and the first variable display of the second special symbol (fluctuating loss effect) is started based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory). , as shown in FIG. 70(d), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reservation number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". At this time, a display is performed in which a shielding image SYG that shields the production pattern 70a, pending icons, background images, etc. is displayed in the frame and then out of the frame, prompting the user to fire the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a at the top left of the screen. Left-handed hitting notification (display of left-handed hitting image HG, audio output of "left-handed hitting") is performed.

In addition, during the shielding by the shielding image SYG, the mode A background image corresponding to the production mode A, the production pattern 70a of the display mode according to the production mode A, the first pending icon in the first pending icon display area 70B, and the game The number of times GK (here, "7 times") is displayed on the back side of the shielded image, and the second pending icon in the second pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the shielding image SYG goes out of frame, as shown in FIG. The pending icon and the number of games GK become visible. Note that since the variable display of the second special symbol is executed here, the icon is not displayed.

Further, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(f), the left-handed hit notification ends and the effect pattern 70a is in a state of high-speed fluctuation. Further, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(g), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at a loss ("814"), and the game count GK is incremented by 1.

After that, each time the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is started until the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes "0", The effects shown in e) to FIG. 70(g) are repeatedly performed, and the number of games GK is incremented by 1 each time.

Then, the variable time of the variable display of the second special symbol (loss variable effect) that started when the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state became "0" has elapsed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(h), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at a loss ("729"), and 1 is added to the game count GK.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. The number decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Ru.

In this way, when the normal time-saving gaming state in which the rush battle mode is set ends and transitioning to the normal gaming state, an end suggestion image (such as the result display and shutter images) are no longer displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impression that the time-saving gaming state has been executed, to prevent the player from feeling like he has lost money, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends and the state shifts to the normal game state, a variable display is displayed based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state. Left-handed hitting notification (display of left-handed hitting image HG, audio output of "left-handed hitting") is executed at timing 1 before the expiration of the execution period. Therefore, by inducing the player to play the game immediately, the game can be prevented from ending, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Example of production when the normal time-saving game state with wild dance mode set ends)
With reference to FIG. 71, an example of performance will be described when the normal time saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set ends when the time saving number (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0".

Here, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the loss variation display of the second special symbol, which is the final time-saving variation in the wild dance mode, has started, and one variation effect is executed over multiple variation displays. A series of performances will be performed to make it appear as if there is a real person.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 71(b), a display is performed in which the shutter image indicating the end of the time-saving game state is closed, and the background image of the wild dance mode, the production pattern 70a, The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C and the second pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D gradually become invisible.

Then, when the shutter image is completely closed, as shown in FIG. 71(c), a result display is performed to display the results of games during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by the jackpot game. Specifically, character images of "1 win" indicating the number of jackpot games and "450 pt" indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed. Further, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("165") while the performance symbol 70a is not displayed, and the normal time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state.

After that, the stop time (8 seconds) at the end of the time-saving game state, which is longer than the normal stop time (0.5 seconds), has elapsed, and the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second hold memory) has elapsed. ) When the first variable display of the second special symbol based on (the variable display of loss corresponding to the super-shortened variation after the result) starts, as shown in FIG. 71(d), the result display continues. The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reservation number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3".

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("749"), as shown in FIG. 71(e). In addition, the number of games GK remains hidden even during the period when the results are displayed after transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, and even if a variable effect is executed, the number of games is added internally. It is a state in which it is simply carried out and cannot be grasped visually. In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (second holding memory) is executed during the result display, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading performed in the normal gaming state Execution of the performance (pre-read performance based on winning in the first start opening 45) is restricted.

Then, after the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the second special symbol will be fluctuated for the second time (after the result) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second reservation memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. When the loss variation effect corresponding to the super shortening variation is started, as shown in FIG. 71(f), the special symbol TZ variation display starts while the result display continues, and the second pending number display area The number of 70F decreases from "3" to "2". Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("349") as shown in FIG. 71(g).

Furthermore, after the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the second special symbol will be displayed for the third time based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (after the result). When the loss variation effect corresponding to the super shortening variation is started, the special symbol TZ variation display starts while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1". ' decreases to '. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed as a losing result.

After that, the fourth (last) variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state after the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. When (variation effect of loss corresponding to super shortening variation after result) starts, the variation display of special symbol TZ starts while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F becomes "1". decreases from 0 to 0. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 71(h), the special symbol TZ stops and displays when the number is a loss (749), and when the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) elapses, the result is displayed. When the above-mentioned series of performances are completed, the game shifts to a dedicated mode.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 71(i), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the first reserved number display area 70E The number decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Ru. At this time, left-handed notification (display of left-handed hit image HG, audio output of "left-handed hit") urging the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a is executed. Further, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after the addition (in this case, 95 times).

In addition, here we have shown an example in which the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is "4", but if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol is "3", the second special symbol's remaining reserve is "3". If the result display ends and the left-handed notification starts when the fluctuation display is one less time, and the remaining hold of the second special symbol is "2", the second special symbol is displayed two times less. When the result display ends and the left-hand hit notification starts, and the remaining number of the second special symbol is "1", the result display ends and the left-hand hit occurs when the second special symbol fluctuates and is displayed 3 times less. If the notification is started and the remaining reserve of the second special symbol is "0", the result display will end and the left-handed notification will start when the second special symbol is displayed 4 times less. . In other words, if the normal gaming state is transitioned to the customer waiting state, the result display will end and the left hit notification will be executed at the timing when the stop time has elapsed and the customer waiting state has been reached.

In addition, here we have shown an example in which the number of time-saving games becomes "0" when in the wild dance mode, and the normal time-saving game state ends, but the normal time-saving game state ends when the performance mode is super wild dance mode or infinite mode. Even in this case, the process basically progresses as shown in FIGS. 71(a) to 71(i).

In this way, from the variable display of the second special symbol which is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state, one variable performance is made. A series of effects are executed to make it appear as if ``is being executed''. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience an innovative performance that does not make him strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved second special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol in a series of productions, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without the variable display of the production symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize a plurality of fluctuating performances as a series of performances, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, the result display (end suggestion screen Display), it becomes easier to recognize a plurality of fluctuating performances as a series of performances, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, the stop time in the special symbol fluctuating display (result fluctuating effect) in the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state is longer (8 seconds) than the stop time when performing the normal fluctuating display (0.5 seconds). The result display (display of the completion suggestion screen) is executed even during the stop time. Therefore, even if there is no second special symbol remaining (second pending memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state, the execution time of the result display will not become extremely short, so the result display can be fully displayed in the game. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the stop time (8 seconds) in the special symbol fluctuation display (result fluctuation effect) in the final round of the normal time-saving game state is longer than the stop time (8 seconds) during the transition to the normal game state executed during the result display (display of the end suggestion screen). The fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) of the fluctuation display based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the result display from being excessively long and reducing the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is executed during the result display (display of the end suggestion screen) after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, rather than the stop time (8 seconds) in the special symbol variation display (result variation effect) in the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state. The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the result display (display of the end suggestion screen) from being excessively long and reduce the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the transition to the normal game state that is executed during the result display after the end of the normal time-saving game state is longer than the execution time of the predetermined variable performance (all variable performances including super-shortened fluctuations) performed during the normal time-saving game state. The execution time (variation time + stop time = 1 second) of the variable display based on the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbol of time is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the result display (display of the end suggestion screen) from being excessively long and reduce the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends, changes will be made based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state. While it is possible to start the left-handed hit notification (display of the left-handed hit image HG, audio output of "left hit") before the display execution period has elapsed, it is possible to start the left-handed hit notification (display of the left-handed hit image HG, audio output of "left hit"), When the normal time-saving game state in which the normal game mode (wild dance mode, infinite mode) is set ends, a variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state will be displayed as the execution period elapses. It is possible to start the left-handed hitting notification later (after the end of the result display). Therefore, when the normal time-saving game state in which a production mode other than rush battle mode (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) is set ends, the player is not required to fire game balls needlessly, It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the left-handed notification that is executed after the end of the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set, and production modes other than the rush battle mode (wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, infinite mode) The left-handed notification that is executed after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state in which is set is executed in the same notification mode (notification content, notification time, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the control efficiency when notifying the left-handed player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends, a left-handed hitting notification (left-handed hitting image HG display and audio output of "left-handed strike"), while the normal time-saving game state in which production modes other than rush battle mode (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Mugen mode) are set ends. In this case, it is possible to start the left-handed hit notification at any one of a plurality of timings (timing corresponding to the remaining number of reserved second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state). Therefore, since the start timing of the left-handed hit notification changes depending on the type of performance mode set in the normal time-saving game state, it is possible to change the gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

Also, during the period from the end of the normal time-saving game state in which a performance mode other than rush battle mode (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) is set until the left-handed notification starts (result display ends) Until then), execution of the jackpot preview performance and the pre-read performance (to the first starting opening 45) that are executed in the normal gaming state is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to let the player soak in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, during the period from the end of the normal time-saving game state in which a performance mode other than rush battle mode (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode, Infinite mode) is set until the left-handed notification starts (result display ends) Until then), control is limited to the performance mode (including performance modes such as look-ahead zone performance) corresponding to the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to let the player soak in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a series of performances are executed from the variable display of the second special symbol which is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. However, in the variable display of the second special symbol which is the final time saving variation, the series of performances is not started and the second special symbol is displayed based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. A series of effects may be executed over the variable display of symbols. In this case, it is preferable to perform a special SP ready-to-win performance or result display in the first variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state.

(Example of production when you get a small hit by holding the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 72, an example of performance will be described in which a small win is achieved with the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition from the normal time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set to the normal game state.

Here, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the second special symbol which is the time saving final variation, a series of effects that appear as if one variable effect is being executed over multiple variable displays is started, and as shown in FIG. ), it is assumed that a variable performance that results in a loss is being executed. At this time, the winning light emitting effect that targets the second pending memory (small win) is continuing, and the top lamp 10b is in a state of emitting yellow light.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 72(b), a display is performed in which the shutter image indicating the end of the time-saving game state is closed, and the background image of the wild dance mode, the production pattern 70a, The icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C and the second pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D gradually become invisible.

Then, when the shutter image is completely closed, as shown in FIG. 71(c), a result display is performed to display the results of games during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by the jackpot game. Specifically, character images of "1 win" indicating the number of jackpot games and "450 pt" indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed. Further, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("165") while the performance symbol 70a is not displayed, and the normal time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state.

However, since the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a small hit, the result display executed here is This is a special result display (a type of look-ahead effect) that suggests that a small hit is included in the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of star images YG are displayed at positions avoiding the character images displayed in the result display.

After that, the stop time (8 seconds) at the end of the time-saving game state, which is longer than the normal stop time (0.5 seconds), has elapsed, and the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second hold memory) has elapsed. ) When the first variable display of the second special symbol based on (the variable display of loss corresponding to the super-shortened variation after the result) starts, as shown in FIG. 72(d), the result display continues. The variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reservation number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3".

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("749") as shown in FIG. 72(e). In addition, the number of games GK remains hidden during the period when the results are displayed after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, and even if a variable effect is executed, the number of games is added internally. It is a state in which it is simply carried out and cannot be grasped visually. In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (second holding memory) is executed during the result display, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading performed in the normal gaming state Execution of the performance (pre-read performance based on winning in the first start opening 45) is restricted.

Then, after the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the second special symbol will be fluctuated for the second time (after the result) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second reservation memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. When the small hit variation effect corresponding to the revival variation is started, as shown in FIG. 72(f), the variation display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reservation number display area 70F becomes "3". decreases from 2 to 2. At this time, a revival effect starts and a text image saying "We still have a long way to go!" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72(g), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the production position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" (here, the current It is announced that the variable display of the second special symbol will result in a small hit). At this time, the top lamp 10b goes out and the winning light emission effect ends.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the revival production ends, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops at a special roll ("555") common to small hits and jackpots, and temporarily stops. As time elapses, as shown in FIG. 72(h), the production pattern 70a stops displaying a special number ("555") common to small hits and jackpots, and the special symbol TZ displays "V" indicating a small win. It will stop and display at a small winning number ("5V5") including "."

Then, when the normal stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the series of performances described above ends, the opening of the small winning game starts, and the small winning game is executed as shown in FIG. 72(i). A "BONUS" image indicating ``BONUS'' is displayed, and at the same time, a first right-hitting notification (display of the first right-hitting image MG1) urging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the gaming area 5a is executed.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(j), a second right-hitting notification (second right-hitting image) prompting to shoot the game ball to the right side of the gaming area 5a is displayed instead of the "BONUS" image. MG2 display) is executed.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "jackpot" image indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed, and a game ball is fired to the right side of the gaming area 5a. The first right-handed hitting notification (display of the first right-handed hitting image MG1) is executed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-hand hit notification (display of a second right-hand hit image MG2) is executed instead of the "jackpot" image to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the gaming area 5a.

In this way, if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second pending memory stored during the specific gaming state) includes one whose pre-reading result is a small hit, It is possible to execute a special result display (pre-reading effect) that guarantees a small win. Therefore, even though the result display gives the player a sense of loss, it can give the player a sense of security, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), it will be a jackpot. The first movable member 73a operates in the same manner as in the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively present the execution of a small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), it will be a jackpot. The same notification sound (``kyuinkyuin'') as in the case is outputted from the audio output device 9. Therefore, it is possible to effectively present the execution of a small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), the performance symbol 70a The same outcome (a special outcome where three of the same numbers are lined up) as in the case of a jackpot is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that a small winning game will lead to a big winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second holding memory stored during the specific gaming state) includes a small hit, the special result display will be executed. However, even if there is a jackpot among the remaining second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal gaming state, a special result display will be displayed in the same display format as for a small win. may also be executed. Further, special result displays may be performed in different display modes depending on whether there is a small win or a big win.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), the performance symbol 70a The same number of results (a special number with three same numbers lined up) as in the case of a jackpot is displayed, but even if the number is the same, the color of the numbers is different, or a specific image (a specific number) is displayed. It is also possible to vary whether or not to add characters or decorative images.

In addition, if the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (the second reservation memory stored during the specific game state) includes a small hit, a small win game (= Although the same special result display is performed regardless of the type of stop special figure data), the special result display may be performed in different ways depending on the type of small winning game.

(Example of production when a small winning game is executed in Super Ranbu mode)
An example of production when a small winning game is executed in the super wild dance mode will be explained using FIG. 73.

Here, as a result of the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol executed in the super random dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small winning game is started, and the first small winning game is It is assumed that the opening has started.

When the opening of the first small winning game is finished and the opening/closing game for changing the state of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 is displayed that urges you to shoot the game ball aiming at 53, and a limit notification effect according to the remaining period of the opening/closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. Begins. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and as time passes, the count image CG is displayed and the display size is enlarged. will be held.

When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at a timing immediately after that, a passing notification effect that indicates that the game ball has passed (enters) the specific area 53 starts, as shown in FIG. 73(b). be done. Specifically, the passage notification image TH consisting of the letter "V" is displayed, and the passage notification sound ``Vacun♪'' is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(c), until the end timing of the opening/closing game (state change of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the small winning game (conversion game) ends. The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) starts, the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) is executed as shown in FIG. 73(d). A “V-BONUS” image is displayed. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game is started and a jackpot effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 73(e). In addition, the total number of balls paid out "660 pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of balls paid out is "660pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game. The number of pitched balls is updated.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (eight seconds in this case) passes without the game ball passing through the specific area 53 (winning) after the start of the small winning game, the count image CG will change to "01" as shown in FIG. 73(f). :99'' and is displayed in a larger size than in FIG. 73(a). When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at a timing immediately after that, as shown in FIG. The device 9 outputs a passing notification sound "Vacuum♪".

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(c), until the end timing of the opening/closing game (state change of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the small winning game (conversion game) ends. The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) starts, the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) is executed as shown in FIG. 73(d). A “V-BONUS” image is displayed. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game is started and a jackpot effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 73(e). In addition, the total number of balls paid out "660 pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of balls paid out is "660pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game. The number of pitched balls is updated.

In addition, when the remaining time of the opening/closing game becomes "0" without the game ball passing through the specific area 53 (winning), the screen is displayed in a larger size than in FIG. 73(f), as shown in FIG. 73(g). The current count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening/closing game). A character image and a character who has fainted are displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect ``ch''.

After that, when the ending of the first small winning game ends, the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is subtracted to 1, as shown in FIG. Rank down from mode to wild dance mode. Then, the wild dance mode background corresponding to the wild dance mode is displayed, and the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are redisplayed. Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are re-displayed, and the time saving remaining number of times image KG is also re-displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is started, as shown in FIG. 73(i), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second pending number The number in the display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one of the pending icons HI is displayed in the corresponding icon display area 70C. Displayed as icon TI. Further, the time saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "80 times remaining" to "79 times".

In this way, when a game ball passes through the specific area 53 in a small winning game (more specifically, an opening/closing game), a passing notification effect is executed to indicate that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53. There is. Therefore, even if the inside of the first jackpot 50 (around the specific area 53) is difficult to see, the player can be sure that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (that a jackpot game will be executed). This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the specific area 53 in a small winning game (more specifically, an opening/closing game), the small winning game (more specifically, an opening/closing game) is executed regardless of the timing at which it passes through this specific area 53. The passage notification performance continues until the end. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot detect the passing notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the small winning game (conversion game), a limit notification effect is executed according to the remaining time of the opening/closing game (the remaining time in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Therefore, the player can be accurately urged to shoot the game ball so as to pass through the specific area 53, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of missing a chance to win a jackpot game.

In addition, depending on the remaining time of the opening/closing game (the remaining time for the game ball to pass through the specific area 53), the notification mode (count number, size of the count image) of the limit notification effect (highly appealing to players) change). Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to players as time passes, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of missing a chance to win a jackpot game.

In addition, in the limit notification performance, a countdown display that allows you to specify the remaining time for opening and closing games allows players to accurately grasp the time when there is a chance to win a jackpot game, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, in a small winning game (conversion game), if the execution period of the opening/closing game passes without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the game ball is identified during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening/closing game). A regret notification effect is executed to notify that the area 53 has not been passed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the jackpot game could not be won, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player feels dissatisfied because the result of the small win game is unclear.

In addition, in the small winning game (opening/closing game) executed as a result of the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) executed in the super wild dance mode (the same applies to the infinite mode), the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53. When the opening/closing game execution period has passed and the small winning game ends, the remaining number of small winnings is reduced to 1 when the small winning special symbol stops, so the remaining number of small winnings is 1. It is now ranked down to the corresponding wild dance mode. Therefore, by setting the production mode according to the remaining number of small wins, when a jackpot game or a small win game is subsequently executed, game conditions that are consistent with the player's recognition will be set, and the game will be It becomes possible to improve interest.

In addition, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game executed during the time saving game state, the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is not "0" (the number of short winnings is also "0"). (not), the time-saving gaming state continues. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be fired during a small winning game due to a malfunction in the firing device or a ball jamming, etc., the player will not suffer an extreme disadvantage and the interest in the game will decrease. It becomes possible to suppress the

In addition, although the limit notification production was made according to the remaining period of the opening/closing game, it may be a production according to the remaining time until the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 is finally in the closed state, or a small winning game. The performance may be performed according to the remaining time.

In addition, a countdown display is executed as a limit notification effect, but a gauge image is displayed for the remaining period of the opening/closing game, and a display effect that shortens the length of the gauge as time passes. It may also be executed. In addition, a specific light emitting means is lit for the remaining period of the opening/closing game, and a light emitting effect is executed in which the color of the light emitted changes over time (for example, blue lights → yellow lights → red lights). You can.

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game executed during the time-saving game state, but the time-saving game state is continued, the time-saving remaining number image KG is in a state where the remaining number of times can be grasped ( Although the remaining number of times is displayed (e.g., 80 times remaining), it may be displayed in such a way that the remaining number of times cannot be grasped (unknown), such as ``??? times''.

Further, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in a small winning game executed during the time-saving game state, but the time-saving game state is continued, a text image such as "It may become a wild dance mode" is displayed. In this case, a suggestion effect indicating that the super wild dance mode or the infinite mode will not be continued may be executed.

(Example of production when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small winning game in Ranbu mode)
With reference to FIG. 74, an example of performance will be described when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small winning game in the wild dance mode (the short winning game ends without transitioning from the small winning game to the jackpot game).

Here, as a result of the fluctuating display (fluctuating performance) of the second special symbol executed in the wild dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the normal game state, and the first small winning game is started. It is assumed that the opening of the first small winning game has started.

When the opening of the first small winning game is finished and the opening/closing game that changes the state of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 is displayed that urges you to shoot the game ball aiming at 53, and a limit notification effect according to the remaining period of the opening/closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. Begins. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and as time passes, the count image CG is displayed and the display size is enlarged. will be held.

After that, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 (win) and the remaining time of the opening/closing game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 74(b), the screen is displayed in a larger size than in FIG. 74(a). The current count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening/closing game). A character image and a character who has fainted are displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect ``ch''.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74(c), an end-suggesting effect is executed that suggests that the time-saving game state will end without changing from a small winning game to a big winning game. Specifically, the shutter image SY closes so as to cover the background image, the "Sorry" text image, and the fainting character, and when the ending period ends, a small win is awarded as shown in FIG. 74(d). The special symbol TZ "5V5" of the mode is re-displayed, and the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F are re-displayed.

After that, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reservation memory) is started, as shown in FIG. 74(e) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts and the number in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". Decrease.

Note that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a variable effect is performed, the number of games is only added internally and is not visually recognized. It is not possible to do so.

In addition, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed and the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (second holding memory) is executed, the jackpot notice that will be executed in the normal gaming state will be announced. The execution of performances and pre-read performances (pre-read performances based on winnings in the first starting opening 45) is restricted.

Furthermore, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 74(f), the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) continues to be displayed, and the special symbol TZ stops displaying at a loss ("346"). do. After that, the special symbol TZ will be displayed in a fluctuating manner with the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) displayed until the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes 0. The stop display is repeatedly displayed.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol TZ when the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0, the shutter image is displayed as shown in FIG. 74(g). While the SY (completion suggestion image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ stops displaying on a losing roll ("559"), and when the normal stopping time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol TZ elapses, the shutter is released. Image SY (end suggestion image) is erased, and the mode shifts to production mode A.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. The number decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Ru. At this time, left-handed notification (display of left-handed hit image HG, audio output of "left-handed hit") urging the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a is executed. Further, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after the addition (in this case, 95 times).

In addition, here we have shown an example in which the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is "4", but if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol is "3", the second special symbol's remaining reserve is "3". The display of the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) ends at the timing when the fluctuation display is one less, and the left hit notification starts, and if the remaining reservation of the second special symbol is "2", the second special symbol The display of the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) ends at the timing when the fluctuation display is less than 2 times, and the left hit notification starts, and if the remaining reservation of the second special symbol is "1", the second special symbol The display of the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) ends at the timing when the fluctuation display is less than 3 times and the left hit notification starts, and if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol is "0", the second special symbol The display of the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) ends and the left-handed hitting notification starts at a timing when the number of fluctuations is displayed four times less. In other words, if the transition to the normal gaming state is in the customer waiting state, the display of the shutter image SY (completion suggestion image) ends and the left hit notification is executed at the timing when the stop time has elapsed and the customer waiting state is entered. will be done.

In addition, here we have shown an example where the remaining number of small wins becomes "0" when in the wild dance mode, and the normal time-saving game state ends (ends without transitioning from the small winning game to the big winning game), but in the wild dance mode Even if the remaining number of small wins becomes "0" in the first special time-saving game state in which the number of small wins is set and the puncture ends, the game will basically be as shown in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(h). It will progress.

In this way, in the small winning game (open/close game) executed as a result of the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) executed in the wild dance mode, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the execution period of the open/close game. When the small winning game ends after passing, the remaining number of small winnings is subtracted to 0 when the small winning special symbol stops, and the time-saving gaming state ends, so the mode changes to production mode A corresponding to the normal gaming state. The rank will be lowered (the player will be notified that they are in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the game state is set to be consistent with the player's perception, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in a small winning game, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the opening/closing game passes and the small winning game ends (the time saving gaming state does not continue), the normal gaming state The result display is not executed before a certain event is announced (various performance images corresponding to performance mode A are displayed). Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game without giving the player a sense of loss of missing out on the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) remains displayed from the end of the small winning game to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. A series of performances are now being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience an innovative performance that does not make him strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved second special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol in a series of productions, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without the variable display of the production symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize a plurality of fluctuating performances as a series of performances, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, in a small winning game, if the opening/closing game execution period elapses without the game ball passing through the specific area 53 and the small winning game ends and the time saving gaming state ends without continuing, the time saving gaming state ends. It is possible to display a shutter image SY (completion suggestion image) that suggests that the second special symbol will be It is possible to change the display period of the shutter image SY (end suggestion image) depending on whether there is a hold or when there is no second special symbol remaining. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that reflects the game situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the shutter image SY( The execution time (variation time + stop time = 1 second) of the variable display based on the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state, which is executed while displaying the end suggestion image) It's been a short time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter image (display of the end suggestion image) from being excessively prolonged and the performance effect to be reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends, changes will be made based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state. While it is possible to start the left-handed hitting notification (display of the left-handed hitting image HG, audio output of "left-handed hitting") before the display execution period has elapsed, it is possible to start the left-handed hitting notification (display of the left-handed hitting image HG, audio output of "left-handed hitting"). When the first special time-saving game state ends suddenly, the variable display based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state will be displayed after the execution period has elapsed (after the display of the shutter image ends). ), it is possible to start the left-handed hit notification. Therefore, when the normal time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set ends suddenly, the player is not required to fire game balls needlessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, there is a left-handed notification that is executed after the end of the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set, and the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set. The left-handed notification that is executed after the puncture ends is executed in the same notification manner (notification content, notification time, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the control efficiency when notifying the left-handed player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends, a left-handed hitting notification (left-handed hitting image HG On the other hand, when the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set ends, multiple timings can be started. It is possible to start the left-handed hit notification at any timing (timing according to the remaining number of second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal game state). Therefore, since the start timing of the left-handed notification changes depending on the type of time-saving game state that has ended, it is possible to change the gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, from the end of the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set until the left-handed hit notification starts (until the display of the shutter image ends), the normal Execution of the jackpot preview performance and the pre-read performance (to the first starting opening 45) executed in the gaming state is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to let the player soak in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, from the end of the normal time-saving game state or the first special time-saving game state in which the wild dance mode is set until the left-handed hit notification starts (until the display of the shutter image ends), the normal Control is limited to performance modes (including performance modes such as look-ahead zone performance) that correspond to the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to let the player soak in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is executed, that is, the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading are performed. Instead of setting the state in which no performance is performed, the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be allowed and the execution of the pre-read performance may be regulated, or vice versa. In addition, execution of specific preview performances among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., winning/losing performance, jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) is permitted, and execution of other preview performances (e.g., dialogue preview performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in preview performance, etc.) is permitted. ) may be regulated, or the execution of a specific effect among the look-ahead effects (for example, a light-up effect when winning a prize) may be permitted, and the execution of other effects (for example, a look-ahead zone effect or a look-ahead countdown effect) may be restricted. etc.) may be regulated.

(Example of production when special time-saving production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 75, an example of a performance in which a special time-saving performance is executed due to RWM clearing not being performed at the start of power supply will be described. In addition, special time-saving effects include RWM clear negative effects that suggest that RWM clear has not been performed (it remains deferred), activation counter displays that indicate the number of changes until the first special time-saving game state is entered, etc. can be mentioned.

Here, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is displayed 395 times (variable effect), and the power supply is stopped (power OFF) during the normal game state, and the power supply is restarted (power OFF). It is assumed that after the control state of the game is restored when the power is turned on, variable display of special symbols (variable performance) is executed 48 times.

Then, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal gaming state (production mode A) as the 49th special symbol fluctuation display after the power supply is restarted (the gaming control state is restored). The variable display (variable effect) has started, and "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F, and the first pending icon display area Two pending icons HI are displayed in 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Further, 48 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 48 to 49.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (fluctuating effect) is started as a variable display of the special symbol that is the 50th time after the power supply is resumed and is less than 100 times remaining until the first special time-saving game state, As shown in 75(c), the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the number in the first pending icon display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1". The two pending icons HI displayed in 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI.

At this time, when it is determined to perform the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display, the stationary notification character SC is displayed as the RWM clear denial effect and the first notification character SC is displayed as the activation counter display, as shown in FIG. A notification logo LG including the words "Help Time" meaning a special time-saving game state and a character image "66 remaining" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed. Further, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the first reservation number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and the reservation icon HI is additionally displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B.

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 75(e), the stationary notification character SC and the activation counter display are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the screen so as not to obstruct the visibility of the performance symbol 70a. Ru.

After that, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number ("624 ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 49 to 50, and the text image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "65 remaining".

Furthermore, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as the 51st variable display of the special symbol after the power supply is resumed, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the effect pattern 70a and the special The variable display of the symbol TZ starts, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B change to the corresponding icon. One of the icons is shifted toward the display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and the variable display of the special symbol is repeated for the 60th time after the power supply is resumed and for the 10th time since the start of the RWM clear negative effect. As a result, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as a loss ("294"). Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, and the number of games GK is increased from 59 to 60. Further, the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "55 remaining", and the stationary notification character SC that has been executed over 10 variable displays is erased, and the execution of the RWM clear negative effect is completed.

In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation display is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state) and there are less than 100 times left until the first special time-saving game state, the RWM clear negative effect will be displayed. If execution is not decided, RWM will be cleared when the special symbol is displayed for the 100th time after the power supply is resumed, provided that it is not in the first special time saving game state (normal game state). It will be decided to execute the negative performance.

In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation display is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state) and there are less than 100 times left until the first special time-saving game state, the activation counter display is executed. is not determined, when the 100th special symbol fluctuation display is performed after the power supply is resumed, the activation counter will be displayed on the condition that the first special time saving game state is not (normal game state). It will be decided to carry out the following.

In addition, when the RWM clear negative performance or activation counter display is executed, and the jackpot preview performance or pre-read preview performance is not executed, but if it is determined that the jackpot preview performance or pre-read preview performance will be executed, It is possible to execute a jackpot preview performance and a look-ahead preview performance in parallel with the RWM clear negative performance and the activation counter display.

In this way, if RWM clear is not performed at the start of power supply, RWM clear is denied during the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuating effect) for a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after power supply restarts. A presentation (display of stationary notification character SC) is executed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to visually understand that the game is in a deferred state where RWM clearing has not been performed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the RWM clear negative performance is executed from the start of the RWM clear negative performance until the variable display (variable performance) of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times (in this case, 10 times). Therefore, even if the player misses the start of the RWM clear negative performance, the player can be reliably informed that the RWM clear negative performance is being executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, if RWM clear is not performed at the start of power supply, the activation counter display (fluctuating effect) will be displayed during the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuating effect) for a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after power supply is restarted. 1. Display of a notification logo LG including the words "Help Time" meaning a special time-saving game state and a character image "66 remaining" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (variable performance) until the first special time-saving game state is entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the character image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is made up of only numbers and does not include unit display such as times or number of times. As a result, players are more likely to look up what this number means, and by increasing their chances of seeing machine information, they can deepen their understanding of gaming machines and increase their interest in gaming. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, the text image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is not displayed at the start of the fluctuation performance when the jackpot preview performance or look-ahead performance is likely to be executed (started), but rather when the jackpot notice performance or look-ahead performance is executed before the fluctuation start. (Start) It is updated when a production pattern that is difficult to start is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the execution timing of the RWM clear negative effect and the execution timing of the activation counter display are set to the same time (50th or 100th time after restarting power supply). Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the timing of transition to the first special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution timing of the RWM clear negative effect and the activation counter display is during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after the power supply is resumed (recovery of the gaming control state). However, RWM clear negative performance or activation counter display is executed during the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuating performance) a predetermined number of times before transitioning to the first special time-saving game state (for example, 50 times or 100 times before). Alternatively, one of the RWM clear negative performance and the activation counter display may be changed to a special symbol fluctuation display ( The other may be during a variable display (variable effect) of special symbols a predetermined number of times before (for example, 50 times or 100 times before) the transition to the first special time-saving game state. In such a case, it may be executed at a predetermined rate 50 times before shifting to the first special time saving game state, and if it has not been executed 50 times before, it may be executed 100 times before.

(Example of production when entering the customer waiting state when transitioning to the first special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 76, an example of a performance in a case where the player is in a customer waiting state when the first special time saving game state is entered will be explained.

Here, it is assumed that the 496th special symbol variable display (variable effect) has been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the activation counter display has already been executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76(a), as the 497th special symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol variation display (variation performance) has started, and the first pending number display area 70E "3" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F, three pending icons HI are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and three pending icons HI are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is displayed. Further, 111 times is displayed as the number of games GK, and the activation counter display shows "4 remaining."

At this time, in response to the start of the variable effect, when the remaining number of changes until the special time-saving game state is reached reaches 3, a countdown effect will start, and a number image of "3" indicating the remaining 3 times will be displayed. .

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, the number of games GK is increased from 111 to 112, and the text image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "3 remaining".

Furthermore, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is started as the 498th special symbol variable display after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 76(c), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display of is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area. The icons are shifted toward 70C and one icon is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a number image of "2" indicating the remaining two times is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, the number of games GK is increased from 112 to 113, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "2 remaining".

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started as the 499th variable display of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as shown in FIG. 76(e). The variable display of is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI that were displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area. The icons are shifted toward 70C and one icon is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a number image of "1" indicating one remaining time is displayed as a countdown effect.

In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has passed, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number (“634 ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 113 to 114, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "1 remaining".

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is started as the 500th variable display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 76(g), the performance symbol 70a And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and the one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B becomes The icon is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a number image of "0" indicating 0 times remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of games GK is increased from 114 to 115, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "0 remaining". In addition, since the first special time-saving game state was started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, a right-hitting notification (first right-hitting image MG1 display) is started.

Furthermore, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 76(i), the pending memory is set to "0" and the customer waiting state starts, but this corresponds to the normal gaming state. The display of the mode A background image and activation counter display is maintained, and transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state is awaited. On the other hand, since the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed after the first special time-saving game state is started, the number of games GK is erased.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demonstration performance starts as shown in FIG. 76(j), and the first special time saving game state is called Help Time A guidance image AN indicating that the device is equipped with the help time is displayed. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration performance has passed, the state shown in FIG. 76(i) is restored, and the state shown in FIG. 76(i) and the state shown in FIG. 76(j) repeatedly.

In this way, a countdown effect suggesting a transition to the first special time-saving game state is executed from the variable display of special symbols (fluctuating effect) a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before transitioning to the first special time-saving game state. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp when the first special time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is also possible to improve the player's expectations for the occurrence of the first special time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, the time when the special symbol stopped displaying after the 500th variation time of the special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, has passed and the first special time saving game state is entered, that is, the time when the special symbol During the stop time, the first right-handed hit image MG1 is used to notify the right-handed hit. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to play right-handed as soon as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th variable display variation time of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, has entered the first special time-saving game state, the performance mode is changed to the first special symbol. 1. Transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state is awaited. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the stopped display of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state is entered due to the special symbol being stopped and displayed after the 500th variable display variation time of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times, has passed since the end of the jackpot game, the number of games GK is Although it is displayed, the number of games GK is erased when the special symbol stop time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness in which the number of games GK is displayed even though the first special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to determine whether or not the first special time-saving gaming state is occurring based on whether or not the number of games GK is displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the first special time-saving gaming state is entered, if the player is waiting for a customer, the activation counter display will remain displayed, so for example, if the player leaves and returns, the game The player can be informed of the state of progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Additionally, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance, a guide image AN that says "Help Time Equipped" is displayed, indicating that the first special time-saving game state is equipped with Help Time. There is. Therefore, the player can understand that excessive investment can be suppressed and relief can be obtained by the first special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the special symbol stopped displaying and entered the first special time-saving game state, instead of erasing the number of games GK, the effect of entering the first special time-saving game state, which will be described later, was executed. The number of games GK may be deleted accordingly.

In addition, instead of displaying the guide image AN that says "Help Time Equipped" during the entire period during the customer waiting demo performance, for example, a demo display of model information (various performances, character introductions, etc.) is performed. The guide image AN may be displayed while the model name is being displayed without displaying the guide image AN, or vice versa. Even in this case, it is preferable not to display the guide image AN while the manufacturer name is being displayed.

In addition, instead of displaying the guide image AN that says "Help Time Equipped" on the image display device, the surface of the game board (which may be inside the game area or outside the game area) or the glass frame 4. You may write "Help Time Equipped" on a part, etc., or display a guide image AN saying "Help Time Equipped" on the image display device, and also display a part of the surface of the game board, a part of the glass frame 4, etc. It may also be written as "Equipped with help time".

(Example of performance when variable performance is executed after transition to the first special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 77, an example of a performance in the case where a variable performance is executed after transition from the performance mode A to the first special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, as a result of the 500th variable display of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the losing special symbol is performed and the first special time-saving game state is generated, and the first right-handed hit image MG1 causes a right-handed hit. It is assumed that notification has been made.

In this state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 77(a), , the variable performance is started and the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and at the same time, the relevant icon is displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C.

After that, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. Then, a long rush effect) is executed. Specifically, the notification logo LG displayed on the activation counter that was displayed at the bottom right of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and enlarged, and the text image "START" indicating the start of the first special time-saving game state is displayed. is displayed, a fourth right-handed hit image MG4 having a larger size than the first right-handed hit image MG1 is displayed, and right-handed hit notification is executed.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, a blackout effect in which the screen is covered by a dark image is executed, as shown in FIG. 77(c), and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed, , as shown in FIG. 77(d), an infinite mode entry display is performed that suggests entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time saving game state.

After that, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display elapses and the entry effect of the first special time saving game state ends, the entry effect of the first special time saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time saving number are displayed. The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of (J2) is displayed as "749 remaining times".

In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number (“234 ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the activation counter display is erased and the entry effect of the first special time saving game state is not executed. The performance of performance mode A corresponding to the normal game state (display of mode A background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the performance symbols 70a and special symbols TZ continues.

After that, when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops "3" after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the right performance symbol 70a also has a reach that stimulates whether or not "3" stops, as shown in FIG. 77(g). When the inciting effect is performed and the reach inciting effect period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(h), a ready-to-reach state is formed and a character image saying "Complete" is displayed, indicating that the reach-in state has been completed. After that, the middle symbol immediately stops temporarily at "3".

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a jackpot roll ("333") indicating a jackpot, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit as the first variable display in the first special time saving game state, basically, as shown in FIGS. 77(f) to 77(i) The performance changes, but the number that is stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes the small winning number ("3V3").

Also, when the first variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state, basically the effect is as shown in FIGS. 77(a) to 77(i). will continue to change.

In this way, when the special symbol stops displaying during the predetermined (500th) variable display of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game and shifts to the first special time-saving game state, the The variable performance pattern is determined, and the rush performance (long rush performance) of the first special time-saving game state can be executed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the first special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after a blackout effect in which the screen is shielded by a dark image (shielding image) is executed as an entry effect in the first special time saving game state, an infinite mode entry effect is executed. Therefore, the transition from the normal gaming state to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving gaming state can be performed without any discomfort, and the player can be made aware that the transition has been made to the first special time-saving gaming state, and the game It becomes possible to improve the interest of

In addition, in conjunction with the start of the initial variable display of special symbols in the first special time-saving game state, a right-hitting notification will be performed using the fourth right-hitting image MG4 (during blackout performance, during infinite mode entry performance). It has become. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the first special time-saving game state can understand that the player will play right-handed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the entry effect of the first special time saving game state is executed in a different effect form from the case of transitioning to the normal time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that a time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state has occurred, and also to inform the player in a novel manner that the first special time-saving game state has occurred, and to improve the game speed. It becomes possible to improve interest.

In addition, if the first variable display of special symbols after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is a loss, the entry effect of the first special time-saving game state is executed during the fluctuating display, and the first special time-saving game state is If the first fluctuating display of special symbols after transitioning to the gaming state results in a jackpot or small win, the entry effect of the first special time-saving gaming state will be restricted from being executed during the fluctuating display. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss due to a quick hit after entering the first special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, if the initial fluctuating display of the special symbols after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state results in a jackpot or small win, a different performance mode (small intrusion at the corner of the image display device) will be used than in the case of a loss. The entry performance of the first special time-saving game state may be executed in a mode with low appeal power (performance effect) such as execution of the performance.

In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuation display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is the first special symbol fluctuation display, the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state is executed, and the second special In the case of a variable display of symbols, the entry effect of the first special time-saving game state may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state, it is performed normally after the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols in the game state may be set to be longer than the normal stop display period, and the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state may be executed during the stop display period. . In this case, instead of changing the performance mode to the infinite mode when the rush performance ends, the performance mode may be set to the infinite mode when the variable display of the next special symbol (variable performance) starts.

In addition, here we have shown the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state, but when moving to the second special time-saving game state, the same entry performance as that of the first special time-saving game state is executed. It's good to do that.

(Example of production when countdown mode is executed)
An example of the effect when the countdown mode is executed due to RWM clearing being performed at the start of power supply will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. The countdown mode is set when the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state until the transition to the first special time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number (here, 50 times), and when the first special time-saving gaming state is changed. This is a production mode that displays a countdown to encourage anticipation of the transition.

Here, as shown in FIG. 78(a), as the 450th special symbol fluctuation display after RWM clearing performed at the start of power supply, the first special symbol is displayed in a normal gaming state (production mode A). (variable effect) has been started, "4" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area, and 4 is displayed in the first pending number display area 70B. One hold icon HI is displayed, and the icon TI is also displayed in the icon display area 70C. Furthermore, 449 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ become a losing number ("814") as shown in FIG. 78(b). ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 449 to 450.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as the 451st special symbol variable display after the RWM clearing performed at the start of power supply, as shown in FIG. 78(c), The variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are The icons HI are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI.

At this time, since the countdown mode activation condition of 50 times until the first special time saving game state is satisfied, the countdown mode introduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 78(d). Specifically, the door image TO (shielding image) is closed so as to cover the background image and various icons, etc., and as shown in FIG. An image of the text "entering mode" is displayed.

When the countdown mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 78(f), the door image TO disappears, the countdown mode background image is displayed, and the countdown mode is suggested (notified) at the bottom right of the screen. A countdown mode icon IC is displayed, and a character image "49 remaining" indicating 49 remaining times is displayed on the upper left of the screen as a countdown display CD. Further, the presentation pattern 70a changes from a display mode including characters and numbers to a display mode including only numbers.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 450 to 451.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. The number decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. Is displayed. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted from "48 remaining" indicating the remaining 48 times.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and after the 496th variation time of the first special symbol has passed since RWM clearing, the first special symbol becomes a losing special symbol. When the game is stopped and displayed, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed when the result is a loss ("175"), as shown in FIG. 78(i). Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 495 to 496, and the countdown display CD displays "4 remaining" indicating 4 remaining games.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) is started as the 497th special symbol variable display after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 79(j), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one icon is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "3 remaining", and in response to the start of the variable effect, the countdown effect is started when the remaining number of changes until the first special time saving game state is reached is 3. , a character image of "3" indicating three times remaining is displayed.

After that, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number ("673 ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 496 to 497.

Also, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) is started as the 498th special symbol variable display after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 79(l), the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one icon is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "2 remaining" and a character image of "2" indicating 2 remaining times is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 497 to 498.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) is started as the 499th special symbol variable display after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 79(n), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI that were displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one icon is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "1 remaining" and a character image of "1" indicating one remaining time is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 498 to 499.

Also, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) is started as the 500th special symbol variable display that is the specified number of times after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 79(p), the performance symbol 70a and The variable display of the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and the one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B becomes the corresponding one. The icon is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "0 remaining" and a number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining times is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 499 to 500. In addition, since the first special time-saving game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, a right-hand hit notification (first right-hand hit image MG1 display) will start.

Furthermore, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(r), the pending memory is set to "0" and the customer waiting state starts, but this corresponds to the normal gaming state. Mode A background image and countdown display are maintained, and transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time-saving game state is awaited. On the other hand, since the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed after the first special time-saving game state is started, the number of games GK is erased.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demonstration performance is started as shown in FIG. A guidance image AN indicating that the device is equipped with the help time is displayed. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration performance has passed, the state shown in FIG. 79(r) is restored, and the state shown in FIG. 79(r) and the state shown in FIG. 79(s) repeatedly.

In this way, when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 50 times) before shifting to the first special time-saving game state, a countdown starts from any of the performance modes A to C corresponding to the normal game state. mode. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the first special time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the countdown mode, the countdown that suggests transitioning to the first special time-saving gaming state from the variable display (fluctuating effect) of special symbols a predetermined number of times (in this case, three times) before shifting to the first special time-saving gaming state The performance is now executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp when the first special time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is also possible to improve the player's expectations for the occurrence of the first special time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, when the special symbol stops displaying after the 500th variable display variation time, which is the specified number of times after clearing RWM, the special symbol stops displaying and enters the first special time-saving game state, that is, the special symbol stops. From the middle of the day, the first right-handed hit image MG1 is used to notify the right-handed hit. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to play right-handed as soon as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th variable display variation time of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times after clearing RWM, becomes the first special time saving game state, the production mode is set to the first A transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time saving gaming state is on standby. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the stopped display of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special time-saving game state is entered due to the special symbol being stopped and displayed after the 500th variable display variation time of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times, has passed since the end of the jackpot game, the number of games GK is Although it is displayed, the number of games GK is erased when the special symbol stop time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness in which the number of games GK is displayed even though the first special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to determine whether or not the first special time-saving gaming state is occurring based on whether or not the number of games GK is displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if you enter the first special time-saving gaming state, if you are waiting for a customer, the countdown display will be maintained, so for example, if you leave your seat and come back, the progress of the game will be delayed. It is possible to let the player know what the state is, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol stopped displaying and entered the first special time-saving game state, instead of erasing the number of games GK, the effect of entering the first special time-saving game state, which will be described later, was executed. The number of games GK may be deleted accordingly.

Further, although the countdown display is decremented at the start of the variable display (variable performance) of the special symbol, it may be subtracted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Example of performance when variable performance is executed after transition to the first special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 80, an example of a performance in a case where a variable performance is executed after transition from the countdown mode to the first special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, as a result of the 500th fluctuating display of the special symbol after clearing the RWM, the stop display of the losing special symbol is performed and the first special time-saving gaming state occurs, and the first right-handed hit image MG1 notifies the right-handed hit. It is assumed that

In this state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the first special time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 80(a). , the variable performance is started and the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and at the same time, the relevant icon is displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C.

After that, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. Then, a short rush effect) is executed. Specifically, a character image "achieved" is displayed together with an effect image (obscuring image) of a size that blocks the background image, etc., and a fourth right-handed image MG4 having a larger size than the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed. is displayed and the right hit notification is executed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80(c), an infinite mode entry display indicating entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the first special time saving game state is performed. Furthermore, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display elapses and the entry effect of the first special time saving game state ends, the entry effect illustration of the first special time saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time saving game state are displayed. The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times (J2) is displayed as "749 remaining times".

Moreover, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, as shown in FIG. The effect of the mode (display of the countdown mode background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ continues.

After that, when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "3" after a predetermined time has elapsed, the right performance symbol 70a also temporarily stops at "3" and a reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 80(f). Then, as shown in FIG. 80(g), a reach effect (reach variation without rush effect) is executed.

Then, when the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a jackpot roll ("333") indicating a jackpot, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit as the first variable display in the first special time saving game state, basically, as shown in FIGS. 80(e) to 80(h) The performance changes, but the number that is stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes the small winning number ("3V3").

Also, when the first variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the first special time saving game state, basically the effect is as shown in FIGS. 80(a) to 80(h). will continue to change.

In this way, if the special symbol stops displaying during the specified number of variable displays (500 times) after clearing RWM and shifts to the first special time-saving game state, the variable display that is not dedicated to the entry display After the pattern is determined, it is possible to execute the entry performance (short entry performance) of the first special time-saving game state. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the first special time-saving game state has been entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the short entry effect is the variation time of the shortest special symbol variation pattern among the multiple special symbol variation patterns that may be determined in the specified number (500) special symbol variation display after RWM clearing. is set to a shorter time. Therefore, no matter what kind of special figure variation pattern is determined, it is possible to execute the rush performance and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the first special time-saving game state results in a jackpot, the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss due to a quick hit after entering the first special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, if the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is a jackpot or small hit, the entry effect of the first special time-saving game state is not executed, but it may result in a loss. In the same way as in the case where the first special time-saving game state is entered, the effect may be executed.

In addition, if the first special symbol fluctuation display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is the first special symbol fluctuation display, the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state is executed, and the second special In the case of a variable display of symbols, the entry effect of the first special time-saving game state may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state during the execution of the first special symbol fluctuation display after transitioning to the first special time-saving game state, it is performed normally after the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols in the game state may be set to be longer than the normal stop display period, and the entry performance of the first special time-saving game state may be executed during the stop display period. . In this case, instead of changing the performance mode to the infinite mode when the rush performance ends, the performance mode may be set to the infinite mode when the variable display of the next special symbol (variable performance) starts.

Further, in the countdown mode, an effect such as a battle between an ally character and an enemy character may be performed. In this case, a character image such as "Enter countdown mode. If the friendly character withstands attacks from enemy characters until the count reaches 0, enter infinite mode" may be displayed in the introduction effect of the countdown mode. When transitioning to the first special time-saving game state, a performance is performed in which the ally character endures the attack of the enemy character until the final special symbol fluctuation display (variable performance) in the normal game state, and the first special time-saving game state is performed. If the game state does not change (the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game is executed), the ally character cannot withstand the attack of the enemy character and loses (the jackpot game is executed when the countdown mode is not on). It is also possible to perform a performance that is the opposite of the performance in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, which is performed as a reach performance in the case where the enemy character wins.

(Example of effect when the first special time-saving game state in which infinite mode is set ends)
With reference to FIG. 81, an example of performance will be described when the first special time saving game state in which the infinite mode is set ends when the number of time saving times (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0".

Here, it is assumed that a countdown performance suggesting the end of the first special time-saving game state is being executed from the variable display of special symbols (fluctuating performance) three times before the end of the first special time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the number images of "3" → "2" → "1" are displayed every time the special symbol variable display (variable effect) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), when the variable time has elapsed in the variable display of the second special symbol one time before the end of the first special time saving game state and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, The production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed when a losing result ("234") is made. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. In addition, the remaining time saving game image KG, which is displayed in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time saving game state, is "1 game remaining", and the game number GK is a fluctuation display from before the first special time saving game state occurred. The number is 1,249, which is the same number as the previous one.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) that causes the first special time-saving game state to end is started, as shown in FIG. 81(b), the variation of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The display starts, the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are moved to the icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the time saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "1 time remaining" to "0 times remaining", and a number image of "0" indicating 0 times remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

Thereafter, when the second special symbol's fluctuation time has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ become a losing number ("134") as shown in FIG. 81(c). ”) to stop displaying. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the first right-handed image MG1 is erased because the normal game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an end suggestion effect indicating that the first time-saving game state ends is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the shutter image SY is closed so as to block the background image, various icons, and the like.

Then, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reservation memory) is started, as shown in FIG. 81(d) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (occlusion image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". do.

Note that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a variable effect is performed, the number of games is only added internally and is not visually recognized. It is not possible to do so.

In addition, during the period when the shutter image SY is displayed and the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (second holding memory) is executed, the jackpot notice that will be executed in the normal gaming state will be announced. The execution of performances and pre-read performances (pre-read performances based on winnings in the first starting opening 45) is restricted.

Furthermore, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. ) to stop and display.

Furthermore, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory) is started, as shown in FIG. 81(f) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (occluding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1". do.

After that, the special symbol TZ changes and stops while the shutter image SY (shielding image) is displayed until the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes 0. The display is repeated.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes 0 has elapsed, the shutter is released as shown in FIG. 81(g). While the image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("559").

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 81(h), the shutter image SY (shielding image) disappears, the performance mode A background image is displayed, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and left-handed hitting notification (display of left-handed hitting image HG, audio output of "left-handed hitting") prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the gaming area 5a is started. In addition, the game count GK is re-displayed by accumulating the number of variable displays (including the number of variable displays during the first special time-saving game state) since the RWM clear or the end of the jackpot game.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining reserve (first reserve memory) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserve number display area The number 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be done.

Thereafter, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number ("814"), as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the number of games GK is increased from 1254 to 1255.

In this way, when the first special time saving game state ends when the time saving number (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0", it is announced that the normal gaming state is in effect (various production images corresponding to production mode A). The result display is not executed before the results are displayed (displayed). Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game without giving the player a sense of loss of missing out on the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the shutter image SY is displayed from the variable display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. In this state, only the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience an innovative performance that does not make him strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved second special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG that urges the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of a series of presentations. Therefore, the player is not required to shoot game balls needlessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the shutter image SY after the end of the first time-saving game state is longer than the execution time of the predetermined variable performance (all variable performances including ultra-shortening fluctuations) executed during the normal time-saving game state and the first special time-saving game state. The execution time (variation time + stop time = 1 second) of the variable display based on the remaining hold (second hold memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state, which is executed while the (end suggestion image) is displayed. is a short time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter image (display of the end suggestion image) from being excessively prolonged and the performance effect to be reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends, changes will be made based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state. While it is possible to start the left-handed hitting notification (display of the left-handed hitting image HG, audio output of "left-handed hitting") before the display execution period elapses, when the first special time-saving game state ends, , It is now possible to start the left hit notification after the execution period has elapsed (after the display of the shutter image is finished), based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. ing. Therefore, when the first special time-saving game state ends, the player is not required to fire game balls needlessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the left-handed notification that is executed after the end of the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set, and the left-handed notification that is executed after the end of the first special time-saving game state, They are executed in the same notification manner (notification content, notification time, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the control efficiency when notifying the left-handed player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving game state or the second special time-saving game state in which the rush battle mode is set ends, a left-handed hitting notification (left-handed hitting image HG On the other hand, when the first special time-saving game state ends, it is possible to start at any one of multiple timings (the first one at the time of transition to the normal game state). 2) It is possible to start the left-handed hit notification at a timing corresponding to the remaining number of special symbols. Therefore, since the start timing of left-handed notification changes depending on the type of time-saving game state that has ended, it is possible to change the gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the period from the end of the first special time-saving gaming state to the start of the left hit notification (until the display of the shutter image ends), the jackpot notice performance and pre-reading performance that are executed in the normal gaming state Execution (to the first starting port 45) is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to let the player soak in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, from the end of the first special time-saving game state until the start of the left hit notification (until the display of the shutter image ends), the production mode corresponding to the normal gaming state (pre-reading zone production, etc.) (including the production mode). Therefore, it is possible to let the player soak in the afterglow of the end of the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the first special time saving game state, the remaining time saving number image KG is displayed at the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time saving game state. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the game is in a time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of time-saving games, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is executed, that is, the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading are performed. Instead of setting the state in which no performance is performed, the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be allowed and the execution of the pre-read performance may be regulated, or vice versa. In addition, execution of specific preview performances among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., winning/losing performance, jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) is permitted, and execution of other preview performances (e.g., dialogue preview performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in preview performance, etc.) is permitted. ) may be regulated, or the execution of a specific effect among the look-ahead effects (for example, a light-up effect when winning a prize) may be permitted, and the execution of other effects (for example, a look-ahead zone effect or a look-ahead countdown effect) may be restricted. etc.) may be regulated.

In addition, in the special time saving game state, the remaining time saving number image KG is not displayed in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time saving gaming state, but in a different position and/or in a different display mode than in the normal time saving gaming state. KG may also be displayed. In this way, it becomes easier to recognize whether the game is in a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of performance when power outage recovery is performed during the normal gaming state after the end of the first special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 82, an example of a performance in a case where a power failure recovery is performed during the normal gaming state after the end of the first special time-saving gaming state will be described. In addition, here, an example is shown in which production mode A is set after the end of the first special time saving game state, but other production modes (production modes B, C, post-end exclusive mode) are set. The situation is basically the same.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(a), the player is in a waiting state with the production mode A set, and the production symbol 70a of the losing number ("814") and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. "1255" is displayed as the number of games played.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped in this state, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 become invisible, and the lighting device including the top lamp 10b turns off. The light will turn off. Thereafter, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the top lamp 10b remains off, as shown in FIG. 82(c). .

Then, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power supply was stopped (waiting for customers), the performance control board 130 receives ), the production mode A is set as the initial mode after the power is restored, and the mode A background image, the production pattern 70a that will be the initial roll ("753") after the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, "???" is displayed as the number of games GK, indicating that the number of fluctuations before transitioning to the first special time-saving game state is unknown, and a notification indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been executed is performed. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b emits light in a specific light emission mode (for example, blinks red at 750ms) different from the light emission mode at the time of error (for example, blinks red at a cycle of 250ms), and the first special time-saving game state has been executed. An announcement will be made suggesting that.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss starts, as shown in FIG. 82(e), the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is directed toward the icon display area 70C. The icon is shifted and displayed as the icon TI.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the performance symbol 70a enters a state of high-speed fluctuation as shown in FIG. 82(f), and if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped in this state, As shown in g), the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 are not displayed, and the lighting device including the top lamp 10b is turned off. Thereafter, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, a loading screen (initial screen) is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the top lamp 10b remains off, as shown in FIG. 82(h). .

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power supply was stopped (during the special symbol fluctuation display), as shown in FIG. As shown in (i), a recovery screen is displayed indicating that the system has recovered from the power outage, a voice saying "Restoration is in progress" is output, and the top lamp 10b remains off.

After that, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol confirmation command sent from the main control board 110 is received, as shown in FIG. 82(j), after the power is restored. Production mode A is set as the initial mode, the mode A background image, the production symbol 70a that will be the initial roll ("753") after the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and the first special time-saving game state is set as the number of games GK. ``???'' is displayed, indicating that the number of fluctuations until the transition to ``???'' is unknown, and a notification indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been executed is performed. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b emits light in a specific light emission mode (for example, blinks red at 750ms) different from the light emission mode at the time of error (for example, blinks red at a cycle of 250ms), and the first special time-saving game state has been executed. An announcement will be made suggesting that.

In this way, in the normal game state after the first special time-saving game state ends, there is no transition to the first special time-saving game state again, so the normal game after the first special time-saving game state ends. When the power supply that was stopped in the state is restarted and the game control state is restored, the number of games GK is set as "???" as a specific notification indicating that the first special time-saving game state has been executed. It is possible to execute a first specific notification to be displayed and a second specific notification to cause the top lamp 10b to emit light in a specific light emission mode. Therefore, the player can recognize that the first special time-saving game state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power supply that was stopped in the normal gaming state (during the special symbol fluctuation display) is restarted and the gaming control state is restored after the first special time-saving gaming state ends, it is assumed that the power has been restored from the power outage. The first notification (display of the power recovery screen, audio output of “Restoration in progress”) suggesting that ?” display and the top lamp 10b). Therefore, the player can recognize that the power supply has been restored and that the first special time-saving game state has ended, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that although a specific light emitting unit (for example, the top lamp 10b) is made to emit light in a specific light emission mode (for example, flashing red at 750 ms intervals) that is different from the light emission mode at the time of an error (for example, flashing red at 250 ms intervals), The blinking cycle in a specific light emission mode may be faster than the blinking cycle in the light emission mode at the time of an error, or may be made to be the same.

In addition, when the power is restored in the normal gaming state after the end of the first special time-saving gaming state, a specific notification indicating that the first special time-saving gaming state has been executed is executed. In response to the transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the 1st special time-saving gaming state, a specific notification indicating that the 1st special time-saving gaming state has been executed without the need for power outage recovery (game count GK " ???" display and the top lamp 10b) may be executed.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in the second embodiment, the normal time-saving game state ends even if there is a remaining number of small winnings by stopping and displaying a specific small winning special symbol, and the remaining number of small winnings set for each jackpot game. Since this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 83(a) is a diagram showing a first gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, and FIG. 83(b) shows a first gaming state setting table that It is a diagram showing a second game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the first gaming state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving game state is in effect), a first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special time-saving game state that ends the time-saving game state. A second time saving number (J2), which is the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time saving gaming state. The remaining number of small winnings (Z1), which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state, and the third remaining number of small winnings (Z2), which is the number of specific small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state, are associated.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), the second game state setting table includes the stop special symbol data of the small hit special symbol and the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area, which indicates the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53. information, a gaming state flag to be set (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving gaming state), a first time saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and a time saving flag. The second time-saving number (J2) is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the second number of variable displays is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time-saving gaming state. 3. The number of small winnings (J3), the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time saving gaming state, and the third small winning number (Z1) which is the number of specific small winning fluctuation displays that end the time saving gaming state. The remaining number of hits (Z2) is associated with the remaining number of hits (Z2).

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. One point is that the remaining number of third small winnings (Z2) is set, which is the number of times (variable display) that will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small winning fluctuations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. ) and the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) may be set to different numbers. By doing this, it is possible to create a case in which the time-saving gaming state ends regardless of any type of small winning variation, and a case in which the time-saving gaming state ends only due to a specific small winning variation. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110. Here, only the differences from the special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27 will be explained, and the explanation of the matching parts will be omitted.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S320-13, and if it is a small winning special symbol, in step S320-10, the small winning amount is saved in the main RAM 110c until the time saving gaming state is ended. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of hits (Z1).

In step S320-10A, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small hit special symbol is the third small win special symbol (special symbol 15). If it is not the third small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S320-11, and if it is the third small winning special symbol, the remaining number of second small winnings (Z2) is subtracted by 1 in step S320-10B. do.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) has become "0". If the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) or the remaining number of third small winnings (Z2) becomes "0", the process moves to step S320-12 as the time saving gaming state is ended, and the remaining number of small winnings is If it is not "0", the process moves to step S320-13.

In this way, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47, the time saving number (J1, J2, Even if J3) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, players try to advance the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the combination of the effect patterns 70a that are stopped and displayed (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small hit game) ), it becomes possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning game is executed) during the time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 47, the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) remains. Even if it is, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, players try to advance the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the combination of the effect patterns 70a that are stopped and displayed (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small hit game) ), it becomes possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Game flow showing a modification example related to the time-saving game state)
A game flow showing a modified example related to the time-saving game state will be described using FIG. 85.

First, in the normal game state, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state. During this first time-saving game state, if you win the first special loss and the time-saving symbol A is stopped and displayed, and if you win the second special loss and the time-saving symbol B is stopped and displayed, The winning is invalidated and the first time saving game state is maintained. Further, when the end condition (number of time reductions = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) is satisfied during the first time-saving game state, the game returns to the normal game state. Further, when a jackpot game is executed during the first time-saving game state, the state shifts to the first time-saving game state again.

Further, in the normal game state, when the first special loss is won and the time-saving symbol A is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game. During this second time-saving game state, if you win the first special loss and time-saving symbol A is stopped and displayed, and if you win the second special loss and time-saving symbol B is stopped and displayed, The winning is invalidated and the second time saving game state is maintained. Further, when the end condition (number of time reductions = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) is satisfied during the second time saving game state, the normal game state is returned. Further, when a jackpot game is executed during the second time-saving game state, the state shifts to the first time-saving game state.

Further, in the normal game state, when the second special loss is won and the time-saving symbol B is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game. During this third time-saving game state, if you win the first special loss and time-saving symbol A is stopped and displayed, and if you win the second special loss and time-saving symbol B is stopped and displayed, The winning is invalidated and the third time saving game state is maintained. Furthermore, when the termination condition (number of time reductions = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) is satisfied during the third time-saving game state, the game returns to the normal game state. Further, when a jackpot game is executed during the third time-saving game state, the game does not shift to the time-saving game state but shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, if the loss fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) consecutively after RWM clear or the end of the jackpot game, the game state at that time (normal game state, 1st to 3rd time saving game state) Regardless, the game shifts to a special time-saving game state without going through a jackpot game (if it is a time-saving game state, the time-saving game state ends and shifts to a special time-saving game state). During this special time-saving game state, if you win the first special loss and the time-saving symbol A is stopped and displayed, and if you win the second special loss and the time-saving symbol B is stopped and displayed, the winning is invalidated and the special time-saving gaming state is maintained. Furthermore, when the termination conditions (number of time reductions = 0, remaining number of small wins = 0) are satisfied during the special time saving game state, the game returns to the normal game state. Further, when a jackpot game is executed during the special time-saving game state, the state shifts to the first time-saving game state.

In addition, for the first time-saving game state, various controls are performed using the table corresponding to the normal time-saving game state shown in FIG. 38, and for the second time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state shown in FIG. Various controls are performed using a table corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Therefore, basically, a performance (performance mode, etc.) different from that in the normal gaming state is executed, and a different performance (performance mode, etc.) is performed between each time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, regarding the third time-saving game state, various controls are performed using the table corresponding to the normal game state shown in FIG. Since the game enters the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, the situation is either the same as the normal gaming state or more disadvantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Therefore, basically the same performance (performance mode, etc.) as in the normal game state is executed.

In this way, the third time-saving gaming state is set to be the same as the normal gaming state or to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Therefore, even though it is a time-saving gaming state, it is possible to play the third time-saving gaming state as if it were a normal gaming state, and it is also possible to diversify the gaming performance of the time-saving gaming state, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, if you win the first special win in the normal game state, you will move to the second time-saving game state in which the second special win is invalidated. The probability of winning a special lottery is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of players to play games after the opening of the gaming parlor, it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming parlor immediately after opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in gaming. .

Furthermore, in the third time-saving game state, basically the same performance (performance mode, etc.) as in the normal game state is executed. Therefore, even though it is a time-saving gaming state, it is possible to play the third time-saving gaming state as if it were a normal gaming state, and it is also possible to diversify the gaming performance of the time-saving gaming state, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, when the second starting port 47 is not open, the image display device does not notify the right hit, and when the second starting port 47 opens or is open, the image display device does not notify the right hit. It is also possible to support the winning of the second starting opening 47 by providing a winning notification. In this way, it is possible to make the player aware of the third time-saving gaming state through the right hit notification, and the player is less likely to lose money, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the second starting port 47 is opened and a right-handed hit notification is performed, or when the number of times reaches a predetermined number, a special A special performance mode may be set, or a special performance mode may be set when an event that is unfavorable to the player, such as a loss in the reach performance, occurs a predetermined number of times. Good. By doing this, it is possible to perform a performance that reflects the result of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, in conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the Gaming machines that execute game effects are common. Some of these gaming machines have movable bodies (starting opening opening/closing member, big prize opening opening/closing member, specific area opening/closing member, etc.) that are operated by a drive source (solenoid, etc.) controlled by the main control board, Some games operate a movable body by operating a drive source in accordance with the progress of a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-118109). However, in such a game machine, it is not possible to replace the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) at the time of shipment from the factory or at a game store (only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500 can be replaced). There has been a problem in that it is difficult to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means at times such as (including).

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there is a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening/closing member 51, a specific area opening/closing member 52, and a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means starts controlling the progress of the game after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process), it is possible to initialize the drive source (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means are provided. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, Prizes are awarded based on the first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57) and the establishment of the granting conditions (the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, starting opening, and grand prize opening). Value adding means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize ball, prize ball data), and the main control means controls the game after power supply is started. In a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) before starting the progress control of The granting of said prize value by means shall be invalidated. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, there is provided a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, a specific area opening/closing member 52, a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means is configured to satisfy a starting condition (a game ball enters a starting opening or a regular gate). An advantageous game (special game, auxiliary game) in which a display means (special symbol display, normal symbol display) displays symbols in a variable manner based on the ball entering the ball, and operates the drive source according to the result of the variable display. ), and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply until the start of control of the progress of the game, the drive source is initialized (ON) in a predetermined manner. ⇔OFF), and in the pre-start state, execution of the variable display and execution of the advantageous game are restricted. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a drive source (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b) controlled by the main control means. , the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the flow path switching solenoid 52b, the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) an opening/closing member 52, a second big prize opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means includes an initial operation means capable of initially operating (ON⇔OFF) the drive source in a predetermined manner; Information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on actual results (number of payouts during normal play, number of outs during normal play) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor); In the pre-start state (initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until the progress control of the game is started, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and the initial operation is performed by the initial operation means. During execution, display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, there is provided a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, Prizes are awarded based on the first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57) and the establishment of the granting conditions (the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, starting opening, and grand prize opening). A value imparting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of imparting value (prize balls, prize ball data), and control of the progress of the game is started after power supply is started. In a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) until the start, the awarding of the prize value by the value assigning means is invalidated, and the main control means initializes the drive source (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner. The system calculates specific information (normal base value) based on the initial operating means that can be used and the gaming performance (number of payouts during normal play, number of outs during normal play), and displays the specific information on the information display means (performance display monitor). information display means capable of displaying the information, wherein in the pre-start state, the initial operation is performed by the initial operation means, and during the execution of the initial operation, the specific information is displayed by the information display means. Display is regulated. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there is provided a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, a specific area opening/closing member 52, a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means is configured to satisfy a starting condition (a game ball enters a starting opening or a regular gate). a variable display means capable of performing a variable display of symbols on a display means (special symbol display device, normal symbol display device) based on the ball entering the ball; and a variable display device that operates the driving source according to the result of the variable display. An advantageous game means that can execute an advantageous game (a small winning game, a big winning game), an initial operation means that can initialize the drive source (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner, and a game performance ( information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play, and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor); and the initial operation by the initial operation means is executed in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply until the start of control of the progress of the game, and during the execution of the initial operation. , execution of the variable display by the variable display means, execution of the advantageous game by the advantageous game means, and display of the specific information by the information display means are regulated. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
Here, some conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a starting condition. Some of these gaming machines execute a special game based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area provided inside the winning device during the execution of a specific game (for example, (Refer to Publication No. 2018-057968). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is to play a special game (jackpot game) or a specific game (small win game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the starting hole). ); a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state; A winning device (big winning opening) that changes the game medium from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win during the execution of a specific game; special game execution means for executing the special game based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specified area (specific area 53), wherein the game medium has passed through the specific area during execution of the specific game. Based on the gaming state at the time, it is possible to perform predetermined processing (such as processing for setting gaming conditions after a jackpot game). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The second configuration for solving the above problem is to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the starting hole). comprising a determining means for making a determination, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the determining means a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a first starting condition (winning a prize in the first starting opening); and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a second starting condition (winning a prize in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, a second special game). If the first determining means determines to execute the special game, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed; The states include a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The third configuration for solving the above problem is to execute a special game (big win game, small win game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not the above is the case; a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state; and execution of the special game. Therein, a winning device (grand prize opening) that changes from a state in which it is difficult for game media to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize, and a specific area provided inside the prize winning device during execution of the special game. A game state determining means capable of determining a game state to be controlled thereafter based on the passage of the game medium through the (specific area 53). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, a first jackpot game). , a second jackpot game), and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (big win) and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and the first judgment means When it is determined that the first result (jackpot) is achieved by A first specific game state (normal time-saving game state where the second time-saving number is set to 7: rush battle mode) that is controlled after the end of the second special game, and a second specific game state that is controlled after the second special game ends. (Normal time-saving game state: Ranbu mode in which the second time-saving number is set to 55 times; normal time-saving game state: Ranbu mode in which the second time-saving number is set to 95 times). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, a second V jackpot game). and a third special game that is more advantageous than the second special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game), and the judgment result of the judgment means includes a first result (jackpot) and a third special game that is more advantageous than the second special game. , there is a second result (small win) different from the first result, and when the first result is determined to be the first result (big win) by the first determination means, the first special game and the second result are Any one of the special games can be executed, and if the second result (small win) is determined by the second determination means, the second special game can be executed, and the second determination means determines that the second result is a small win. When the first result (big hit) is determined, the third special game can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, the third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, the second V jackpot game). There are a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment result of the judgment means includes the first result (jackpot ), and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and in the specific game state (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode) that is controlled after the second special game is executed, If the second determination means determines the first result (big win), the third special game can be executed, and if the second determination means determines the second result (small win) Then, the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, the third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, the second V jackpot game). There are a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment result of the judgment means includes the first result (jackpot ) and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and in the specific gaming state (infinite mode) controlled after the third special game is executed, the second determining means If the first result (big win) is determined by the second determination means, the third special game can be executed, and if the second result (small win) is determined by the second determination means, the third special game can be executed. 2 special games can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned determining means is present, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of symbols based on the determination by the determining means, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time saving game) more advantageous than the normal gaming state. a first performance mode (performance modes A to C), and a second performance mode (countdown mode) different from the first performance mode. controllable performance control means, and the determination means includes a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting condition); and a second determination means for making a determination based on winnings in the second starting opening), and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is higher than the first special game. There is a second special game that is advantageous (for example, a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game), and the game state control means is configured to play a predetermined number of special games after the end of the special game. It is possible to control the specific gaming state until the variable display is executed, and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled via the special game; There is a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the performance control means is configured to control the second specific game state a predetermined number of times (50 times) before being controlled to the second specific game state. When the variable display is executed, control is performed from the first performance mode (any of performance modes A to C) to the second performance mode (countdown mode). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
Here, some conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a starting condition. Some of these gaming machines control the game to a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special game ends (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-057968). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol determining means based on the determination result of the determining means. a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the determination result of the determination means; a normal game state; and a specific game state different from the normal game state. (a time-saving gaming state), and the special games include a first special game (a second jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game, and a second V jackpot game). , a second special game different from the first special game (a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game, a 1V jackpot game, a 3rd V jackpot game), and the game state control means controls the It is possible to terminate the specific gaming state based on the execution of the variable display, and when the first special game is executed, the specific gaming state may be terminated regardless of the gaming state before the execution of the first special game. If the number of times of the variable display for ending the specific game state does not change and the second special game is executed, the variable display for ending the specific game state according to the game state before execution of the second special game. The number of times can be changed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a specific game (small winning game) that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result of the determining means, A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of symbols, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, the gaming state The control means is capable of ending the specific gaming state based on the number of times it is determined that the specific game is to be executed in the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol variation based on the result of the determination. A variable display execution means capable of executing a display, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state (time-saving game state) ); and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game; It is possible to terminate the specific game state based on the fact that the game state is established, and the performance control means controls the mode performance (display of various background images, display of remaining number of times, etc.) according to the game state. ?", "Maybe it's a jackpot and a wild dance?"), and in the specific game state, information related to the ending condition (remaining number of small wins) is not clearly announced, but the ending condition is determined by the mode performance. It is now possible to suggest information related to By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol variation based on the result of the determination. A variable display execution means capable of executing a display, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state (time-saving game state) ); and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game; ) becomes "0") or the second ending condition (the first time reduction number (J1), the third time reduction number (J3), the remaining number of small wins, etc. become "0") is met. , it is possible to end the specific gaming state, and the performance control means is capable of notifying information related to the first ending condition (second time reduction number) during the specific gaming state; 2 Information related to the end conditions (first time reduction number, third time reduction number, remaining number of small wins, etc.) is now limited (the number of times is not announced, but is suggested by the mode presentation, and is not suggested by the mode presentation). ing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (the winning of a game ball in the starting slot), and the aforementioned determination a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a specific game (small winning game) advantageous to the player based on the information; a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; Based on the result of the determination, a specific game execution means capable of executing the specific game; a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state; performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the storage means stores the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45) in a first manner. The determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the winning of the game ball in the second starting port) is stored as a pending memory, and the gaming state control means Based on the number of times it is determined that the specific game is to be executed in the gaming state becomes a predetermined number (remaining number of small wins (Z) = 0), it is possible to end the specific gaming state, and the performance control is performed. The means is capable of displaying an image (result display, shutter image) suggesting the end of the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state ends, and when the specific gaming state ends for the predetermined number of times. , it is possible to change the display period of the termination suggestion screen depending on whether the second pending memory is present or not. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A sixth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the above, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a variable performance according to the result of the determination. an executable performance control means, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled not via the special game. a second specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the performance control means indicates a possibility of being controlled to the second specific gaming state during execution of the variable performance. It is possible to execute a production (time-saving suggestion production), and a predetermined variation production (shortening variation, no reach variation, etc.) that notifies non-execution of the special game has an execution period of the suggestion production. , there is no non-execution period of the suggestion performance, and the predetermined fluctuation performance (jackpot fluctuation) that notifies the execution of the special game includes the execution period of the suggestion performance (before SP reach) and the non-execution period of the suggestion performance. (SP/SPSP Reach, etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a determination unit that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a special game execution means capable of executing the above, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a variable performance according to the result of the determination. an executable performance control means, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled not via the special game. a second specific game state (a first special time-saving game state, etc.), and the variable performance includes a first variable performance in which a first specific performance (N reach) that makes you expect the execution of the special game is executed. and a second variable performance in which a second specific performance (SP/SPSP reach, etc.) is executed that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than the first specific performance, and the performance control means includes: During execution of the variable performance, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance (time-saving suggestion performance) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second specific gaming state, and the first variation performance includes the suggestion performance. There is an execution period of the suggestion performance, but there is no non-performance period of the suggestion performance, and the second variable performance includes an execution period of the suggestion performance (before SP reach) and a non-performance period of the suggestion performance (SP/SPSP reach). (moderate). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes an acquisition means that can acquire determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (a game ball enters a starting slot), and an acquisition means that can acquire determination information (special figure determination information), and a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information; a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; Based on the result of the determination, a special game execution means capable of executing the special game; a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state; a performance control means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination, wherein the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) controlled via the special game; A second specific game state (a first special time-saving game state, etc.) that is controlled without going through a special game, and the variable performance includes a specific performance (development performance, SP /SPSP reach performance) is executed, and the performance control means is capable of displaying suspension information (a suspension icon) according to the number of the suspension memories, and the performance control means is capable of displaying suspension information (a suspension icon) according to the number of the suspension memories, and when the fluctuation performance is being executed. , it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (time-saving suggestive effect) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second specific gaming state, and while the specific effect is being executed, the pending information is hidden. , the above-mentioned suggestion effect can be executed continuously. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the above, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a variable performance according to the result of the determination. an executable performance control means, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled not via the special game. a second specific game state (a first special time-saving game state, etc.), and the variable performance includes a specific performance (development performance, SP/SPSP reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected. There is a specific variable performance, and the performance control means is capable of executing a suggestive performance (time-saving suggestive performance) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the second specific gaming state during execution of the variable performance. , the specific variation performance during the normal gaming state includes an execution period of the suggestion performance (before SP reach) and a non-execution period of the suggestion performance (during SP/SPSP reach), and the first specific game The specific fluctuation performance in the state does not have an execution period of the suggestion performance, but has a non-execution period (full period) of the suggestion performance. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the above, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a variable performance according to the result of the determination. an executable performance control means, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled not via the special game. a second specific game state (a first special time-saving game state, etc.), and the variable performance includes a specific performance (development performance, SP/SPSP reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected. There is a specific variable performance, and the performance control means provides a first suggestion performance (pre-reading performance) that suggests in advance that the special game will be executed, and suggests in advance that the special game will be controlled to the second specific game state. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (a look-ahead effect, an entry effect of the first special time-saving game state, etc.), and when the special game is executed, a predetermined effect in which the special game is executed. It is possible to execute the first suggestion effect even before the period (for example, 1 fluctuation), and when the second specific gaming state is controlled, the second specific gaming state is controlled. Execution of the second suggestion effect is restricted before the predetermined period of time. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol variation based on the result of the determination. A variable display execution means that executes a display, a special game execution means that can execute the special game when the variable display becomes a special result, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state. ), and a performance control means that can control the performance of the game, and the specific game state is controlled via the special game (usually a second specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the gaming state control means is configured to satisfy the first condition (RWM clear). If the fluctuating display a predetermined number of times after the second condition is satisfied (end of the jackpot game) is a losing result, and if the fluctuating display a predetermined number of times after the second condition is met (end of the jackpot game) is a losing result, for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to control to the second specific gaming state over the entire period. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol variation based on the result of the determination. A variable display execution means that executes a display, a special game execution means that can execute the special game when the variable display becomes a special result, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state. ), and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (normally controlled via the special game). and a second specific game state (a second special time-saving game state, etc.) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the game state control means is configured to control the game state from the end of the special game to It is possible to control to the first specific gaming state over one period (for example, 7 times, 55 times, 95 times, 496 times), and the fluctuating display is different from the first loss result (normal loss result). In the case of a 2-loss result (specific loss outcome), it is possible to control to the second specific gaming state over a second period (for example, 10 times) that is different from the first period. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol variation based on the result of the determination. A variable display execution means that executes a display, a special game execution means that can execute the special game when the variable display becomes a special result, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state. ), and a production control means capable of controlling the production of the game, and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) and the first specific gaming state. a second specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state, a second special time-saving gaming state) different from the specific gaming state; It is possible to execute a performance (entering performance), and if the first fluctuating display after being controlled to the second specific gaming state results in a loss, the specific performance may be executed while the fluctuating display is being executed. and if the first variable display after being controlled to the second specific gaming state results in a special result, the specific effect may be executed while the variable display is being executed. It is becoming restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol variation based on the result of the determination. A variable display execution means that executes a display, a special game execution means that can execute the special game when the variable display becomes a special result, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state. ), and a production control means capable of controlling the production of the game, and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) and the first specific gaming state. a second specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state, a second special time-saving gaming state) different from the specific gaming state; It is possible to perform the fluctuating display using different fluctuating patterns depending on the state, and the specific period after the end of the first specific gaming state (the period for extinguishing the remaining reserve of the second special symbol) and the second special symbol. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned variable display using different variable patterns during the specified period after the end of the specified gaming state (the period during which the remaining reserve of the second special symbol is used up). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and a symbol variation based on the result of the determination. A variable display execution means that executes a display, a special game execution means that can execute the special game when the variable display becomes a special result, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state. ), and a production control means capable of controlling the production of the game, and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) and the first specific gaming state. a second specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state, a second special time-saving gaming state) different from the specific gaming state; It is possible to perform the fluctuating display using different fluctuating patterns depending on the state, and the specific period after the end of the first specific gaming state (the period for extinguishing the remaining reserve of the second special symbol) and the second special symbol. It is possible to perform the variable display using the same variable pattern during the specific period after the end of the specific gaming state (the period during which the remaining reserve of the second special symbol is used up). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first determination means capable of executing a first determination (jackpot determination) based on the establishment of the first condition (a game ball enters the starting hole); A first variable display execution means that executes a variable display of the first symbol (special symbol) based on the result of the first determination, and a second determination based on the establishment of the second condition (passage of the game ball to the regular pattern gate). (hit determination), a second variable display execution means that executes a variable display of a second symbol (normal symbol) based on the result of the second determination, and a variation of the first symbol. A special game execution means that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when a special result (jackpot result) is displayed, a normal game state, and a specific game state (time-saving game) different from the normal game state. a game state control means capable of controlling the game performance; and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) a second specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state, a second special time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state; It is possible to perform a variable display of the first symbol using different variation patterns in two specific game states, and the second variable display execution means is configured to perform a variable display in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. With this, it is possible to perform a variable display of the second symbol using different variation patterns. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first determination means capable of executing a first determination (jackpot determination) based on the establishment of the first condition (a game ball enters the starting hole); a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first symbol (special symbol) based on the result of the first determination; and if the variable display of the first symbol results in a special result (jackpot), it is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing a special game (jackpot game); and a second determination means capable of executing a second determination (hit determination) based on the establishment of a second condition (passage of a game ball to a regular game gate). and a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a second symbol (normal symbol) based on the result of the second determination, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time saving game) different from the normal gaming state. a game state control means capable of controlling the game performance; and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) a second specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state, a second special time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state; It is possible to perform a variable display of the first symbol using different variation patterns in two specific game states, and the second variable display execution means is configured to perform a variable display in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. With this, it is possible to perform a variable display of the second symbol using the same variation pattern. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first determining means capable of executing a first determination (jackpot) based on winning of game media in a first starting area (starting opening); a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first symbol (special symbol) based on the result of the determination; and a special display that is advantageous to the player if the variable display of the first symbol results in a special result (jackpot) a special game execution means capable of executing a game (jackpot game); a second determination means capable of executing a second determination (win determination) based on winning of the game medium in the second starting area (general game gate); a second variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a second symbol (normal symbol) based on the result of the second determination; and a second start area when the variable display of the second symbol reaches a specific result (hit number); auxiliary game execution means that can execute an auxiliary game that controls the game from a closed state to an open state, and a game state control means that can control a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state. and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state different from the first specific game state. states (a first special time-saving game state, a second special time-saving game state), and the first fluctuation display execution means displays different fluctuation patterns in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. The auxiliary game execution means can display different opening modes (opening time, number of openings) between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. It is possible to control the second starting region from a closed state to an open state. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a first determining means capable of executing a first determination (jackpot determination) based on winning of game media in a first starting area (starting opening); a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a first symbol (special symbol) based on the result of the first determination; a special game execution means capable of executing a special game (jackpot game); a second determination means capable of executing a second determination (win determination) based on winning of the game medium in the second starting area (general gate); a second variable display execution means that executes a variable display of a second symbol (normal symbol) based on the result of the second determination; and a second start when the variable display of the second symbol reaches a specific result (hit number). Auxiliary game execution means that can execute an auxiliary game that controls an area from a closed state to an open state, and a game state control that can control a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state. and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state different from the first specific game state. game states (a first special time-saving game state, a second special time-saving game state), and the first fluctuation display execution means displays different fluctuation patterns in the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is possible to perform a variable display of the first symbol using ), it is possible to control the second starting region from the closed state to the open state. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of symbols); a special game execution means capable of executing the special game when the variable display results in a special result (jackpot); a normal game state; is equipped with a game state control means that can control different specific game states (time saving game state), and a performance control means that can control the performance of the game, and the specific game state is controlled to a predetermined state via the special game. A specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled over a period of time, and a specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state, a second special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled over a predetermined period without going through the special game, The effect control means is capable of displaying a game result (result display) indicating the result of the game in a predetermined period (a series of advantageous periods) when the specific game state ends, If the special game is not executed during a specific gaming state that does not pass through and the specific gaming state ends, the game result is not displayed and the special game is executed during the specific gaming state that does not pass through the special game. Then, when the controlled specific game state ends after the end of the special game, the game result is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the above, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game. The game state control means is configured to satisfy a first end condition (the second time saving number (J2) becomes "0") or a second end condition (the remaining number of small wins (Z)) in the specific game state. becomes "0"), it is possible to end the specific gaming state, and the performance control means is capable of controlling the performance for a predetermined period (a series of advantageous periods) when the specific gaming state ends. It is possible to display a game result (result display) indicating the result of the game in the game, and when the specific game state ends due to the satisfaction of the first ending condition, it is possible to display the game result. If the specific gaming state is terminated by the fulfillment of the second termination condition, displaying the gaming result is restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the above, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state, and a display means according to the result of the determination. performance control means capable of executing a variable performance that displays performance symbols in a variable manner; the game state control means is capable of controlling the specific game state over a predetermined period; When the specific gaming state ends, an end suggestion screen (result display, shutter image) for the specific gaming state is displayed, and the ending suggestion screen is displayed until the variable performance is executed a predetermined number of times after the specific gaming state ends. It is possible to continue displaying the above after the end of the specific gaming state than the execution time (variation time + stop time) of the predetermined variation production (variation including production symbols) in the specific gaming state. The execution time (variation time+stop time) of the predetermined variation performance (loss variation of only small symbols) performed while the termination suggestion screen is displayed is shortened. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the above, a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game. The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) and a second specific gaming state (first special time-saving gaming state, second special time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state. The performance control means is capable of controlling a plurality of performance modes, including a performance mode to which the first specific game state is transitioned to after the end (a post-end dedicated mode); 2. It is possible to make the performance mode (performance mode A) different from the one that transitions to the end of the specific game state. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area provided in the game area. A determining means capable of determining, a special game executing means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is controllable to be different from the normal gaming state. a game state control means, and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (a first special time-saving game state) and the first specific game state. includes a different second specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state), and the effect control means notifies an instruction (display of a left-handed image) to launch a gaming medium at a specific position (left side) of the gaming area. When the first specific gaming state ends, a specific period (exhaustion period of the remaining reservation of the second special symbol) from the end of the first specific gaming state ) has elapsed, and if the second specific gaming state ends, the instruction notification may be executed before the specific period elapses from the end of the second specific gaming state. It is possible to execute. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area provided in the game area. A determining means capable of determining, a special game executing means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is controllable to be different from the normal gaming state. a game state control means, and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (a first special time-saving game state) and the first specific game state. includes a different second specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state), and the effect control means notifies an instruction (display of a left-handed image) to launch a gaming medium at a specific position (left side) of the gaming area. When the first specific game state ends, any one of a plurality of timings (timing according to the remaining number of second special symbols) can be executed. When the second specific gaming state ends, the instruction notification can be executed at timing 1 (immediately after the stop time of the production symbols has elapsed). It has become. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on winning of game media into a starting area (starting hole) provided in the gaming area. a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination; a normal game state; and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state. ), and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the game state control means controls the specific game state for a predetermined period and then controls the normal game state. The performance control means is capable of executing a preview performance (pre-read performance, jackpot preview performance, etc.) that indicates the possibility that the special game will be executed in the normal gaming state, It is possible to execute an instruction notification (display of a left-handed game image, output of a left-handed game voice) for firing a game medium at a specific position (left side) of the game area, and when the specific game state ends, It is possible to execute the instruction notification after a specific period (expiration period of the remaining reservation of the second special symbol) has elapsed from the end of the specific gaming state, and to execute the instruction after the specific gaming state ends. Until the notification is executed, execution of the preview effect executed in the normal gaming state is restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed based on winning of game media into a starting area (starting hole) provided in the gaming area. a special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the result of the determination; a normal game state; and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state. ), and a performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game, and the game state control means controls the specific game state for a predetermined period and then controls the normal game state. The effect control means is capable of controlling a plurality of effect modes, and is capable of notifying an instruction to launch a game medium at a specific position (left side) of the play area (left-handed image). display, output of left-handed voice), and when the specific gaming state ends, a specific period (expiration period of the remaining reservation of the second special symbol) from the end of the specific gaming state. It is possible to execute the instruction notification after the specific gaming state ends, and from the end of the specific gaming state until the instruction notification is executed, a predetermined performance mode (initial performance mode of the normal gaming state, pre-read mode) (modes such as zones, etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the following; a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state; and a gaming state control means capable of controlling the performance of the game. and a performance control means, and the game state control means controls the game state for a predetermined period when the number of times it is determined not to execute the special game from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clear, end of jackpot) reaches a predetermined specific number of times. It is possible to control to the specific gaming state over a period of time, and from the end of the specific gaming state until the special game is executed, control to the specific gaming state is restricted again, and the effect control means is capable of executing a specific notification (displaying the number of games "???", flashing an error lamp in a specific manner) indicating that the specific gaming state has been executed, and the specific notification includes the first The first specific notification includes a specific notification (displaying the number of games "???") and a second specific notification (blinking of an error lamp in a specific manner), and in the normal gaming state after the specific gaming state ends, the first specific notification It is possible to execute notification and the second specific notification. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing the following; a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (a first special time-saving gaming state) different from the normal gaming state; and a gaming state control means capable of controlling the performance of the game. and a performance control means, and the game state control means controls the game state for a predetermined period when the number of times it is determined not to execute the special game from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clear, end of jackpot) reaches a predetermined specific number of times. It is possible to control to the specific gaming state over a period of time, and from the end of the specific gaming state until the special game is executed, control to the specific gaming state is restricted again, and the effect control means In the case of recovery from a power outage that occurred in the normal gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, a first notification (display of a recovery screen, output of a recovery voice) indicating that the power has been recovered from the power outage, and the specified It is possible to execute a second notification (displaying the number of games "???", flashing an error lamp in a specific manner) indicating that the game state has been completed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A 30th configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing a normal game state, a game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of power supply. an initialization means for initializing the control state of the game if the initialization is not performed; a recovery means for restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power outage occurs when the initialization is not performed; and a recovery means capable of controlling the production of the game. A performance control means, wherein the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled for a predetermined period of time via the special game, and a first specific game state that is controlled for a predetermined period of time without going through the special game. a second specific game state (a first special time-saving game state) that is controlled over a period of time, and the performance control means controls a specific performance related to the presence or absence of the initialization (RWM clear negative performance, setting change suggestion performance, etc.). If a power outage occurs during the normal gaming state after the end of the first specific gaming state, and the power supply is then resumed and the gaming control state is restored, the above-mentioned It is possible to execute a specific performance, and a power outage occurs during the normal gaming state after the end of the second specific gaming state, and then the power supply is resumed and the gaming control state is restored. The execution of the specific effect is restricted. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem includes a determining means that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player; a special game execution means capable of executing a normal game state, a game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of power supply. an initialization means for initializing the control state of the game if the initialization is not performed; a recovery means for restoring the control state of the game to the state before the power outage occurs when the initialization is not performed; and a recovery means capable of controlling the production of the game. A performance control means, wherein the specific game state is a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled for a predetermined period of time via the special game, and a first specific game state that is controlled for a predetermined period of time without going through the special game. a second specific game state (a first special time-saving game state) that is controlled over a period of time, and the performance control means controls a first performance mode (performance mode A) and a second performance mode (performance mode B) It is possible to perform specific effects related to the presence or absence of the initialization (RWM clear negative effect, setting change suggestion effect, etc.), and to control the termination of the first specific gaming state. If a power outage occurs later in the second performance mode, and then the power supply is restarted and the control is controlled to the first performance mode, it is possible to execute the specific performance, and the second specific performance is controlled. If a power outage occurs in the second performance mode after the end of the gaming state, and then the power supply is restarted and control is returned to the first performance mode, execution of the specific performance will be restricted. ing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirty-second configuration for solving the above problem includes an acquisition means capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in a starting slot), and an acquisition means capable of acquiring determination information (special figure determination information); a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information; a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; A game state control means capable of controlling a game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state) different from the normal game state, and a performance control means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the determination. , the storage means stores the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole) as a first pending memory, and stores the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole), and The determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the starting slot is stored as a second pending memory, and the determining means stores the determination information in the second pending memory in priority to the first pending memory in the normal gaming state. The performance control means is capable of executing a specific performance (a look-ahead performance such as an icon change performance, a look-ahead zone performance, etc.) that makes one expect execution of the special game over one or more variable performances. When the second acquisition condition is satisfied during execution of the specific performance that is started based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition, the specific performance can be ended. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (in parallel). The variable display of the special symbols may be performed in the order in which game balls enter the first starting hole 45 and the second starting hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed not to generate a variable probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the type of special jackpot symbol, the variable probability gaming state may be generated. In this case, in a specific round game (for example, the second round game or the final round game) during the jackpot game, the specific area 53 provided inside the first jackpot opening 50 is A process may be performed to generate a variable probability gaming state on the condition that the game ball has passed, or a variable display that causes a variable probability gaming state may be performed based on the gaming state when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 53. A process for determining the number of times may be performed.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on an active line (the awarding condition is met) by a game using medals (gaming media), a predetermined amount of The present invention can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (a so-called slot machine) that can award prize medals (prize medal data) to players. Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 First big winning slot 56 Second big winning slot 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the winning of the game medium in an openable/closable starting area provided in the game area;
A variable display execution means for executing a variable display of symbols based on the result of the determination;
special game execution means capable of executing the special game when the variable display becomes a special result;
a game state control means capable of controlling a predetermined game state in which the special game is not being executed and a specific game state different from the predetermined game state;
A performance control means capable of controlling the performance of the game,
The specific gaming state is
a first specific game state controlled via the special game;
a second specific game state that is controlled without going through the special game;
a third specific game state that is controlled without going through the special game;
The gaming state control means includes:
It is possible to control to the first specific game state for a first period from the end of the special game,
If the variable display is a second specific loss result different from the first specific loss result, it is possible to control to the second specific gaming state over a second period different from the first period,
If the variable display is the first specific loss result, it is possible to control to the third specific gaming state for a predetermined period,
The third specific gaming state is a gaming state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the starting area than in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state,
The performance control means is
In the specific gaming state , it is possible to execute a firing suggestion notification that suggests firing the game medium to a specific area of the gaming area,
A gaming machine characterized in that the firing suggestion notification is not executed when the starting area is in a closed state in the third specific gaming state.